JP7128795B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing games.

As a gaming machine, game balls, which are game media, are shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game balls enter a prize winning area such as a prize winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuation”) identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, the game state (game There is a so-called pachinko machine configured to change the state of the machine (ie, more specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player.

The game value is defined as the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to win the ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. It is to generate a right or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole. If you do, a "jackpot" will occur. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, patterns other than the final stop pattern (for example, the middle pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) continue for a predetermined period of time and are stopped and shaken in a state in which they match a specific display result. Big wins can occur before the final result is displayed due to moving, scaling, or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols changing. The production performed in the state where the sexuality is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is called the reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

Among such gaming machines, there is known a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state. For example, in Patent Document 1, even if the number of times of the special game executed in the normal game state (the number of times of execution of the variable display) reaches 1000 times (special number), when the big win (advantageous state) does not occur (special When the condition is met), the game state is controlled to a probability variable state, the probability of determining a big hit as a result of the special game is increased to about 1/100, and the big win is likely to occur in the subsequent special game. is stated. In addition, in Patent Document 1, when the number of special game games (the number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 times in a normal game state and no big hit occurs, a time saving state is generated instead of the variable probability state. It is described that it is acceptable.

JP 2005-95449 A (0058, 0133, etc.)

However, in conventional game machines, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches the special number of times, and during the period before and after that, the consideration of interest has been insufficient.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that is full of interest.

(Means 1B) The gaming machine according to the present invention can shoot a game medium into a game area in accordance with a player's operation, and when a starting condition is established, the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is displayed. By executing variable display and deriving and displaying a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern), it is possible to control to an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a big win game state), and variably display the first identification information on the display means and A game machine capable of executing variable display of effect identification information corresponding to variable display of second identification information, wherein the state control is controllable to a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which starting conditions are more likely to be established than in a normal state. Means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-19, execute step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 part) and update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) based on the execution of the variable display , a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)). A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-14), and a special state It is preferable to shoot the game medium toward the second flow path, which is selected from the first flow path through which the game medium shot to the game area can flow and the second flow path different from the first flow path. , a first special state that is more advantageous than shooting game media toward the first flow-down path and is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state; and a second special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. and the state control means controls to the second special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of execution times of the variable display and the special condition is satisfied. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-17 In the game control microcomputer 100, step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 are executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the variable display pattern determination means determines that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. It is possible to decide on the specific variable display pattern in both the case where the specific display result is not obtained (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) and (B), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) can be determined for both the case of a big hit and the case of loss), when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result , the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. Reach β) has a higher percentage determined in the case of a big hit than the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation)), and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is higher than the period before the predetermined period Also, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 (F) and (G), immediately before the relief time In, the ratio of determining the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low), the display means is in a state where the game is not progressing, and the special condition is established A special image suggesting that control is possible to the second special state can be displayed when the special condition is satisfied and the number of remaining variable display execution times until the control is performed to the second special state is specified. When a special image is displayed in a display area that is capable of displaying an image and includes at least a part of the display area that displays the specific image, and the special condition is satisfied and the control is performed to the second special state, the second special state is established. A first notification image that notifies that the control of is started, and a second notification image that notifies that the game medium is to be shot toward the second flow path, and a mode that does not overlap with the effect identification information to display the first notification image, and the characters included in the first notification image are larger than the characters included in the second notification image. The second notification image, which is large-sized characters, includes characters and graphics for notifying that the game medium will be shot toward the second flow path .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a time saving classification determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining time saving classification. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 108IW; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 108IW; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 108IW. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal; It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. FIG. 10 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the characteristic part 108IW; It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the production|presentation control main process in the characteristic part 108IW. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; It is a flow chart which shows customer waiting demonstration effect control processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of telop display during customer waiting; It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading advance notice effect execution determination table, a pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and a pre-reading notice effect mode determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each effect type of the pre-reading advance notice effect; It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the relief. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an advance notice effect execution determination table and an advance notice effect mode determination table; It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display to reduce the relief time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect of time-saving rush imitation production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a false countdown production and an effect production; It is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special design stop processing in the modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing next change postponement processing in Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of an effect when executing a variable display that saves time in Modification 1; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining modifications 2 to 4 of the selection method of the variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variation pattern setting processing in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing according to the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a forewarning effect execution determination table and a forecast effect mode determination table in Example 2; FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of an effect when executing a variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment; FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect until it transfers to relief time reduction in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect until it transfers to relief time reduction in the modified example 1 of Example 2. FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of the production mode until it shifts to relief time reduction in Modification 2 of Example 2. FIG.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. In addition, even during the small winning game state, the effect during the small winning to report the small winning game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 108IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characterizing portion 108IW, the game state is controlled to either the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variable state (also controlled in the time saving state). In this example, in the time saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, the average normal figure fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, compared to the normal state Increases the probability of winning in the normal game. For example, in the normal state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern is 10%, while in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern is increased to 90%, and the game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). easier to do. In addition, not only such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, compared with the normal state, by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) It may be configured so that game balls can easily win prizes.

In addition, in this example, in the variable probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased compared to the normal state and the time saving state. In addition, in this example, when it is controlled to a probability variable state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variation display result is a big hit and is controlled to the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big win game, even if the variation display result is a loss, the time saving losing pattern is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a time saving state based on what has been done.

Furthermore, in this example, after turning on the power to the game machine, after the occurrence of the big hit, after the occurrence of time saving, after the occurrence of relief time saving, even if the variable display of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 800 times) is completed, the next big hit Even if there is no time-saving deviation, it may be controlled to a time-saving state (relief time-saving).

In addition, in the time saving state, (1) control to increase the normal pattern per probability, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and (3) open time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Part of the control in (4) may not be performed. For example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving via (1) to (4) may be different in which control is performed, may be the same.

Further, for example, in the low base state, the probability per normal pattern may be 1/1, or the probability of deviation is extremely low and the probability per normal pattern may be substantially 1/1. In other words, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control in (1) is not performed, some or all of the above (2) to (4) are performed to achieve a high base state. may

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of times of fluctuation n until the relief time reduction is controlled and the number of times of reduction of time N in the relief time reduction as follows.
2.5P≤n≤3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750-900, and the number of time reductions N is 120-1140. As will be described later, in this example, when the set value "6" with the highest jackpot probability is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/270. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1", which has the lowest jackpot probability, since the jackpot probability is about 1/319, the number of variations n is 797-957, and the number of times of time saving N is 127-1212. In this example, both the number of times of fluctuation n and the number of times of reduction of working hours N are set to "800", and the above-mentioned regulations are satisfied even when set to any of the set values.

Next, the game machine according to Example 1 in the characterizing portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-47.

(board configuration)
FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic portion 108IW. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-handed informing LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1, fourth pattern displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Among them, the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that performs variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with variable display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth pattern display units 100IW21a and 21b are composed of two LEDs arranged vertically, respectively, and by alternately turning on and off these two LEDs, the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed. be.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 108IW, instead of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. A gate 100IW41 is provided. In this characterizing portion 108IW, a normal game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 108IW, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern increases, so it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the present characteristic portion 108IW, it is more advantageous in the normal state to perform a shooting operation (left hitting operation) aiming at the left side of the game area.

(Hit probability, time saving probability)
FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the time-saving loss probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 8-2 shows the big hit probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 8-3 shows the big hit probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) can be set. Setting confirmation processing and setting change processing can be executed to check the current set values and change the set values. Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, but may be configured so that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 (A) and 8-3 (A), both when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the non-variable state (low In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5” increase in order, and the set value “6” has the highest hit probability “242/65536”. It is high (approximately 1/270) and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 (B) and 8-3 (B), both when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variation state ( In the high probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest (approximately 1/32) jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2420/65536". It is high (approximately 1/27) and is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, in this example, the probability of a big hit is ten times higher in the variable probability state than in the non-variable probability state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-2, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the time saving probability is constant at “164/65536” (about 1/400). Also, as shown in FIG. 8-3, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the time saving probability is constant at “328/65536” (about 1/200). That is, in the present example, the determination value for time saving deviation determination is common regardless of the set value.

While the big hit probability is varied according to the set value as described above, even if the time saving probability is configured to be constant, as shown in FIGS. By varying the probabilities between the set values "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be matched.

In addition, it may be configured so as to be controllable to a small winning game state. When the configuration is such that the small hit can also be determined, for example, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the small hit probability may be configured to be constant.

In addition, when the small hit is configured to be determinable, it may be configured so that there is a time-saving small hit that is controlled to the time-saving state with the small win as a trigger.

The examples shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are only examples, and various aspects can be considered as how to set the jackpot probability and the time-saving loss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is about 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol When executing the display, the time saving probability is about 1/200, but on the contrary, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability is about 1/200, In the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability of losing time may be set to about 1/400.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 8-4(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-4(B) shows a specific example of the big hit type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be one of "normal jackpot", "probability variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be one of "normal jackpot", "probability variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

"Normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 100 times of variable display is completed or the next big hit occurs.

A "variable probability big hit" is a big win that is controlled to a 15-round big-hit game state and is shifted to a variable-probability state after the big-hit game state ends. When shifting to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the variable display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to a variable probability state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

The "suddenly variable probability big hit" is a big win that is controlled to a two-round big win game state and is shifted to a variable probability state after the big win game state is ended. When shifting to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the variable display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to a variable probability state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

In this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "variable probability jackpot", in each round of 15 rounds during the jackpot game, 29 seconds elapse or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of the game The big winning hole is controlled to be open until the ball wins (therefore, the long-term opening of the big winning hole is performed 15 times). On the other hand, when the "sudden probability variable jackpot" occurs, in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game, the big prize opening is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds (therefore, the big prize opening is opened for a short period of time). opening is performed twice). Therefore, in the event of a "suddenly variable probability big hit", it is possible to make it appear as if a sudden transition to a variable probability state has occurred, since it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to be won in the big winning slot.

As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a big win is achieved, it is determined to be a "normal big win" with a probability of 40%. It is determined as a "variable probability big hit" with a probability, and determined as a "sudden variable probability big hit" with a probability of 20%. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big win is achieved, it is determined as a "normal big win" with a probability of 40%. A probability of 5% is determined as a "variable probability big hit", and a probability of 5% is determined as a "suddenly variable probability big hit".

(Time saving type judgment table)
FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Of these, FIG. 8-5(A) shows a specific example of the time reduction type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 8-5(B) shows a specific example of the time reduction type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving lost symbol. , the table referred to for determining the time saving type to be either “time saving A”, “working time saving B”, or “working time saving C”.

As shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving lost symbol. , the table referred to for determining the time saving type to be either “time saving A”, “working time saving B”, or “working time saving C”.

As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) and (B), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the time saving is lost, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed and the time saving In any case of loss, with a probability of 1/3 it is determined to be "time saving A", with a probability of 1/3 it is decided to be "time saving B", and with a probability of 1/3 "time saving C" is determined.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 8-5 is an example, and various aspects can be considered as a method of determining the time saving type. For example, if it is determined that the time saving is lost in the variable display of the first special symbol, the probability of "time saving C" is increased, while if it is determined that the time saving is lost in the variable display of the second special symbol, "time saving The determination ratio of the time reduction type may be made different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, such as by increasing the determination probability of "loss A".

In addition, for example, if it is configured to be able to determine the time saving loss even during the time saving state via the relief time saving, it may be configured not to uniformly overwrite the time saving counter or the like even if the time saving loss occurs, or the time saving loss pattern It may be configured so that there are cases where the time saving number counter and the like are overwritten and cases where they are not overwritten depending on the type.

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving type. As shown in FIG. 8-6, in this example, in the normal state, when it becomes "time saving deviation A", it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving times, and when it becomes "time saving deviation B", the number of time saving times 50 It is controlled to the time saving state of times, and when it becomes "time saving deviation C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times of the number of time saving. Also, in the time saving state, when it becomes "time saving A", it is controlled to the time saving state until the next big hit, and when it becomes "time saving B", it is controlled to the time saving state with the number of times of 200 times, "time saving is off" C”, it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 time saving times. In addition, in the normal state and the time saving state, when it becomes relief time saving, it is controlled to the time saving state of 800 times of the number of times of time saving.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off during the variable probability state. Further, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off even in the time saving state due to the relief time saving. In addition, in this example, as will be described later, after being controlled to the time saving state of 800 times of time saving by relief time saving, if no big hit occurs even after 800 times of fluctuation display is completed, relief time saving is performed again. It is controlled to the time saving state (relief time saving) of 800 time saving times. Therefore, the number of times of time saving by relief time saving is substantially until the next big hit occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value will be described. Relief time saving arrival rate is the rate of being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by changing n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.
K = (1-ML) ⁿ = {(P-1)/P} ⁿ
(K = reduction time arrival rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief short-time arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time-saving arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

In addition, the method of controlling the number of times of working hours reduction in the case of failure to reduce working hours is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-6. For example, even if the same time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it may be configured so that it is the same at 100 time-saving times during the normal state and during the time-saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the number of times of time saving is controlled to 0 times in the time saving state (that is, It may be configured to fall from the time saving state to the normal state). Various modes are conceivable as a method of controlling the number of times of time saving when such time saving is lost.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 108IW. Among them, FIG. 8-7(A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table A for big wins. Also, FIG. 8-7(B) shows a specific example of the deviation pattern table B in the normal state. Further, FIG. 8-7(C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for loss during the time saving state controlled via the big hit. In addition, FIG. 8-7 (D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for loss during the time saving state controlled via time saving loss.

In addition, FIG. 8-8 (E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via relief time saving. Also, FIGS. 8-8 (F) and (G) show specific examples of the variation pattern tables F and G for failure within 10 variations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 8-8 (F) is a variation pattern table for immediately before relief time saving selected when the number of pending memories (eg, the number of total pending memories) is 3 or less. In addition, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 8-8 (G) is a variation pattern table immediately before the relief time reduction selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 4 or more.

Further, FIG. 8-8(H) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table H for the loss in the probability variation state. However, in this example, even if the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending storage is not 1 or more (if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B is used to determine the variation pattern.

Further, FIG. 8-8(I) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table I for the deviation of the variation display that shortens the repair time. Further, FIG. 8-8(J) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table J for the big hit of the variation display that shortens the relief time.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in this example, when a big hit is achieved, the variation patterns are variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PB2. -3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the big hit, the variation pattern PA1-2 (super shortened variation), variation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (D), in this example, if the deviation occurs during the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation), Variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the variation pattern PA1-4 (ultra ultra-shortening variation) , variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (C), FIG. 8-7 (D), and FIG. 8-8 (E), in this example, during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (super shortening fluctuation) and fluctuation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) and fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined at a high rate, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via the time-saving deviation, compared to the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the selection probability of the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80. %, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, during the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving, the selection rate of the variation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortening variation) is as high as 99%, and when the time-saving state is controlled via the time-saving loss or the jackpot In comparison, the average fluctuation time is shorter. With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the variation pattern PA1-4 Due to the (super-ultra-shortened variation), the rate at which the variation display is executed is increased, and the period until the next big win is controlled is shortened, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 (C), 8-7 (D), and 8-8 (E), in this example, compared to the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultrashortening variation) The selection probability is as high as 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or via the jackpot, the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β ) and no super-reach is performed. In other words, during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot, there is no case where the super reach is executed at the time of loss, and the average fluctuation time is shortened there is With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when the jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest. In addition, in this example, in the time saving state controlled via relief time saving, super reach is not executed at the time of deviation, but may be configured to be executed. For example, in the time-saving state controlled via relief time-saving, super reach may be executed at loss at a lower rate than in the time-saving state controlled via time-saving loss or jackpot. With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when the jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach is not lost. Since the ratio of becoming becomes lower, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (F), in this example, if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 3 or less. For example, as the variation pattern, either the variation pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) or the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) is determined, and the probability that the variation pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) is determined is 95%. getting higher. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (G), in this example, if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 4 or more. For example, as the variation pattern, either the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) or the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) is determined, and the probability that the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is determined is 95%. getting higher.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 (F) and (G), if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) is not determined and Super Reach is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest when super reach variable display is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened but the jackpot is not achieved. Note that even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened (that is, the period using the variation pattern table C shown in FIG. 8-7 (C)) At a lower rate, It may be determined to be the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) at the time of loss.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (H), in this example, if there is a deviation during the probability variable state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 8-8 (H), in this example, in the probability variation state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is further averaged than in the time-saving state. is getting shorter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (I), in this example, it is a variation display that shortens the relief time, and if it is lost, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PA3-1 (rush failure). be. In other words, the variation pattern PA3-1 (missing in rush) is a variation pattern dedicated to the short-relief time, which is not used for the variable display that does not result in the short-relief time, but is used only in the variable display (missing) that shortens the remedial time. In this example, when the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PA3-1 (running out), as will be described later, the time-saving rush effect (for example, (See FIGS. 8-38 (G) and (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and that control is performed in the time saving state, and to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (J), in this example, it is a variation display that shortens the relief time, and when the big hit is lost, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rush phantom jackpot) is determined as the variation pattern. be done. That is, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rush phantom jackpot) is a variation pattern dedicated to relief time reduction, which is not used for variation display that does not result in relief time reduction, but is used only for relief time reduction variation display (jackpot). In this example, when the variation pattern PA3-2 (rush phantom big hit) is determined, as will be described later, a time-saving rush effect (for example, FIG. 8 -38 (G), (H)) and the production (for example, see FIG. 8-41 (G′)) in the same mode (for example, see FIG. 8-41 (G′)), after which the production for notifying that it will be a big hit (for example, FIG. 8-41) (H') reference) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the method of setting the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8 is an example, and various modes are conceivable. For example, if the time saving is lost during the time saving state and is controlled again to the time saving state, it is the same as the variation pattern table C for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the big hit shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) A table may be used to determine the variation pattern.

Also, for example, only if the time saving state continues until the next big hit in the case of the time saving loss (in this example, if the time saving loss A occurs during the time saving state), the jackpot shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) A variation pattern may be determined using the same table as the variation pattern table C for deviation during the time saving state controlled by .

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (E), during the time saving state via the relief time saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the ultra-super shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high, and the fluctuation display Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of executable notice effects and pre-reading notice effects. For example, when it is in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the effect of displaying the effect image at the end of the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect of lighting the lamp or LED, the predetermined effect sound, and the normal An effect such as outputting a different variable stop sound is executed.

In addition, in this example, the case of providing a variation pattern table E dedicated during the time saving state via the relief time reduction is shown, but the variation pattern table E dedicated during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is not provided, for example, via the jackpot It may be configured to determine the variation pattern using the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 8-7 (C)) during the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 times or less, the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 8-8 (F) and (G)) are shown. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, it may be configured to switch the variation pattern table so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining variations until the relief time is reduced decreases, or the number of divisions such as 100 times or 200 times of remaining variations Only in the case of , the variation pattern table may be switched to suggest the number of remaining variations.

In addition, in this example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the loss time-saving, and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving are configured to use different variation pattern tables (that is, the average variation time is different). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in either case, the same variation pattern table may be used (that is, the average variation time is the same), and the time saving state via the relief time saving is better than the time saving state via the jackpot or the lost time saving. Also, the average fluctuation time may be made longer.

(Production control command)
8-9 and 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, the command 80XX(H) is an effect control command that designates the variation pattern of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. (fluctuation pattern command). It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives one of the commands 80XX (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decoration pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 specification command) (off specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is lost (no time saving). be.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (time reduction A designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is time saving A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command) (time reduction B designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as time reduction B. be. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command) (time reduction C designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as time reduction C. be.

The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 specification command (probability variation big hit specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a probability variation big hit. Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 specification command (sudden probability variation big hit specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly a probability variation big hit. .

Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until relief time reduction. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until the relief time is reduced is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1 time, the command 9501 (H) is transmitted as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126 times, A command 957E (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command. In this example, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 127 times or more, the maximum value of 7F (H) is set to the EXT data, and the relief time reduction number 1 designation command is uniform. command 957F(H) is sent to

Command 96XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is achieved. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (the number of times in units of 100) until the relief time is reduced is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, the command 9601 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 800 times, A command 9608 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 97XX (H) is an effect control command (restoration relief time reduction number designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction when power is restored. In this example, when the power is restored, a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times of relief time when restoration is performed and transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced at the time of power restoration is 100 times or less, the command 9701 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number designation command at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 times or more. And when it is 800 times or less, a command 9708 (H) is transmitted as a recovery time reduction time number designation command.

In this example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified in units of 126 times, and if the remaining number of times is 127 or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. Although the case of transmitting to . For example, two commands may be combined and transmitted so that even when the remaining number of times is 127 or more, the commands can be transmitted in units of one.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A specification command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and specifying that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol determination C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of a big hit game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates a post-round display (display of an interval between rounds) during a big win game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state when time saving is lost. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state during relief time saving. Command E004 (H) is an effect control command (variable probability state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to a variable probability state.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) that designates the start of the right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) that designates the end of the right-handed notification.

Command F000(H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration specifying command) for designating the start of display of a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the reserved memory is not stored (that is, when the total reserved memory number is 0) at the end of the pattern fixing period and the end of the big hit game. Also, the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (transmitted when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). Further, for example, when shifting to a setting change mode for executing setting change processing or a setting confirmation mode for executing setting confirmation processing, a setting value designation command is transmitted after the end of each mode, and then customer waiting demonstration designation is performed. Command is sent. In addition, when the restoration process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the customer A wait demo specification command is sent. As will be described later, when the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, when 10 seconds pass without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, the relief time saving function is A telop display indicating that the device is installed is started (in this example, a lottery determines whether or not to display a telop). Also, when 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other command after receiving the customer waiting demonstration specifying command, the demonstration movie is reproduced.

Command F1XX (H) is an effect control command (set value designation command) that designates the set value that has been set. A value corresponding to the setting value is set to "XX".

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 8-9 and FIG. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. FIG. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 8-11 is a flow chart showing the game control main processing in the characterizing section 108IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command for instructing recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction number counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction. Control is performed to set a value corresponding to the current relief time reduction counter value and to transmit a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9701 (H) as a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command. Further, for example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9708 (H) as a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear processing is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery processing is executed, the command for specifying the number of times of recovery time reduction is transmitted, and the remaining time until the current relief time reduction The number of fluctuations is notified. In addition, by executing the variable display based on the suspended memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the suspended memory stored before the power failure), the relief time can be reduced. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the power failure occurs in a situation where the pending memory corresponding to the variable display that shortens the relief time is stored before the power failure.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the command for specifying the number of times to shorten the recovery time during recovery is transmitted separately from the command for recovery from a power failure, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to set a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the recovery time is shortened and transmitted.

In addition, when the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "800" is set to the relief time saving number counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the game machine, even if the variation display is executed 800 times, if neither the big hit nor the time-saving deviation occurs, the relief time-saving state occurs. will be controlled by In addition, in this example, it is possible to specify the initial value to be set to the relief time reduction number counter based on the effect control command instructing the initialization transmitted in step S9.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed at the time of turning on the power to the gaming machine, the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" and initialized. Instead, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is not performed when the RAM clear processing is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the time saving flags A to C that indicate the time saving state, the time saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is performed during the time saving state, and the reserved memory are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction number counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the relief time reduction number counter of the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to. In addition, intentional initialization of the relief time reduction counter can be prevented, and the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed, and the RAM When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter may be performed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending memory number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 100IWS52). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 100IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this characterizing part 108IW, the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54 is executed, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole It may be configured as

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 100IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61), and executes the big hit determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3) with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot when they match. It's a program. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. In this case, the CPU 103, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if the probability state is low), the jackpot determination value for low probability (FIG. 8-2 (A) and FIG. 8-3 (A) reference) is used to determine the big hit. In addition, CPU103, if the probability variation flag is set (if the high probability state), using the jackpot determination value for high probability (see FIGS. 8-2 (B) and 8-3 (B)) Judge the jackpot. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3.

If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (normal big win, variable probability big win, sudden variable probability big win) corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area as the type of the big win (step 100IWS65). Incidentally, in this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a big hit (N of step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state is 0. (step 100IWS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 100IWS67), and confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of fluctuation (step 100IWS69).

In this example, steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed before the counting process of the number of fluctuations until the relief time saving after step 100IWS70 to perform the subtraction process of the time saving number counter, but such a processing mode not limited to For example, after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations up to the remedy time saving after step 100IWS70, the time saving number counter subtraction process may be executed. In this case, for example, if it is a variable display that will save time, if the subtraction process is performed after setting "800" in the time saving counter (see step 100IWS172), the value of the time saving counter will be 1 extra. Since it is subtracted, it may be configured to add 1 again to the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction process in the variable display for saving time. Moreover, it may be configured such that "901", which is one more, is set in the time saving number counter in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 100IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the relief time reduction number counter value (step 100IWS71). In this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the game state is normal state, time saving state, or probability variable state, the value of the relief time saving number counter is uniformly updated. . Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time-saving counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N of step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving counter to EXT data, and issues a relief time-saving number 1 designation command. Control for transmission to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time-saving number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 957E(H) as the relief time-saving number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time-saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time-saving decision flag indicating control to the time-saving state at the end of fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time-saving (step 100IWS75). . Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as the EXT data, command 957F as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command (H) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). It is checked whether or not it is (step 100IWS77). Whether or not the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by confirming the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter to the EXT data, and controls the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control is performed to transmit the data to the CPU 120 for use (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608 (H) as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction, and when transmitting the relief time reduction number 1 designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command is shown, but is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction, and to execute a fan effect, a countdown effect, and an effect effect, which will be described later.

In addition, for example, as will be described later, the number of relief time reduction counters is set (set to "800") at the timing of the relief time reduction, and in a configuration where the relief time reduction can occur continuously, the relief time reduction is performed for the first time. Only when it becomes, it is configured to transmit the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 1 and the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 2, and when the time is reduced after the second time, the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 1 and the number of times of saving time 2 are sent. It may be configured not to.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a time saving flag C indicating a time saving state controlled via relief time saving is set (step 100IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if it is in the time saving state via relief time saving), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the processing of step 100IWS79, if it is in the time saving state via relief time saving, without performing the time saving loss determination processing after step 100IWS81, it is assumed that there is no time saving loss as it is. It is decided that

In addition, not only during the time saving state through relief time saving, but also during the time saving state through the big win and during the time saving state through the time saving loss, it may be configured not to uniformly determine the time saving state. That is, not only when the time-saving flag C is set, but also when the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B are set, the time-saving deviation determination processing after step 100IWS81 is uniformly not performed, and there is no time-saving as it is. may decide to exclude

Conversely, even during the time saving state via relief time saving, it may be configured to be able to determine the time saving deviation by executing the processing after step 100IWS81. In addition, it may be configured such that both relief time saving and time saving deviation may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured to control to the time saving state with priority on relief time saving, or may be configured to control to the time saving state with priority on time saving deviation.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if it is not a time saving state via relief time saving), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS80, if it is in the probability variable state, without performing the time saving loss determination process after step 100IWS81, it is determined to be the loss without time saving as it is. be.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability variation state), the CPU 103 uses the time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving loss is determined, lottery processing based on the random number for time saving loss determination and determines whether or not it is time-saving (step 100IWS81). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and the time saving loss is determined with a probability of about 1/400. (See Figure 8-2). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", select the time-saving loss determination table for the second special symbol, and decide to make the time-saving loss with a probability of about 1/200 ( (see Figure 8-3).

If it is determined to be time saving (Y in step 100 IWS82), the CPU 103 determines the type (time saving A or time saving) corresponding to the value that matches the type determination random number value stored in the random number buffer area B, time-saving loss C) is determined as the type of time-saving loss (step 100IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first and second reserve storage buffers, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

In addition, in step 100IWS83, time-saving type determination is performed using the random number for type determination common to the random number for type determination used by jackpot type determination of step 100IWS65, and the random number for type determination. Furthermore, when configured to determine a small hit and also to determine a small hit type, a common type determination random number is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the big hit type determination and time saving type determination. It suffices to configure such that the determination process is performed by

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, when it is determined to be a normal jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and when it is determined to be a probability variable jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "7". When it is decided to make a sudden probability variable big hit, the stop pattern of the special pattern is decided to be "9", and when it is decided to be a time-saving loss A, the stop pattern of the special pattern is set to "2". If it is determined to be time-saving deviation B, the stop pattern of the special design is determined to be "4", and if it is determined to be time-saving deviation C, the special symbol to be stopped is determined to be "6". If it is determined to be lost (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 8-14 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (that is, when it is a variation display for relief time reduction and a big hit), the CPU 103 creates a table for determining the variation pattern in FIG. 8-8 (J ) is selected for the relief time-saving variation big hit variation pattern table J (step 100IWS1701B). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the big hit variation pattern table A shown in FIG. .

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if the win is lost), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (that is, when the variation display is a relief time reduction and is lost), the CPU 103 creates a table for determining the variation pattern in FIG. 8-8 (I ) selects the fluctuation pattern table I for the relief short-time fluctuation loss (step 100IWS 1702B). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (that is, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3 or less. Check if it is. It should be noted that, without being limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the values of the first reserved storage number counter and the second reserved storage number counter are 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the failure immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 8-8 (F). selects the variation pattern table F (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the total pending storage number counter is 4 or more (N of step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the failure immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 8-8 (G). is selected (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not less than 10 (N of step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern table for deviation during the probability variation state shown in FIG. 8-8 (H) Select H (step 100IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and is 0 (that is, if there is no reserved storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) is selected.

If the variable probability flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating the time saving state controlled via the big hit is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via a big hit), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the variation pattern, and via the big hit shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) Select the fluctuation pattern table C for deviation during the controlled time saving state (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no reserved storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating the time saving state controlled via the time saving failure is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via time saving off), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the time saving off shown in FIG. 8-7 (D) Select the fluctuation pattern table D for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and determines the value of the total pending storage number counter. is 0 (that is, if there is no reserved storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving shown in FIG. 8-8 (E) as a table for determining the variation pattern. Select the fluctuation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as a variation pattern for the deviation during the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7 (B) Select table B (step 100IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 is stored in the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, S1715 and the first special symbol determination buffer. 8-7 and 8-8 is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination random number (step 100IWS 1716). In this example, by determining the variation pattern, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the variation time timer to measure the variation time. (step 100IWS1718), and start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 8-15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first, if not yet transmitted, the decision result of whether or not to hit the big hit, the decision result of the big hit type, and the time saving type Based on the result of determination, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be short (step 100IWS1123). 100 IWS 1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to be time-saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when the time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103 is a symbol for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state), the CPU 103 is a design confirmation period for measuring the fixed display period of the stop design of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In that case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If it is not determined to be time saving (N of step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

In this example, when the relief time is shortened by executing the process of step 100IWS1133, the lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol fixation period timer for measuring the fixation display period of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set (N of step 100IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer for measuring the determination display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to "0.5 Seconds" is set (step 100IWS1137). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol determination C designation command or the second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). . In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 8-16 and 8-17 are flowcharts showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol fixing period timer (step 100IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol fixed period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended yet), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag. is confirmed (step 100IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, counts the probability variation flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, the time saving flag C, and the number of times of execution of the variable display during the probability changing state. The probability variable number counter and the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state are reset (step 100IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, "800" is set to the relief time saving number counter with the big hit as a trigger, and even if the variation display is executed 800 times after the big win game ends, neither the next big win nor the time saving occurs. , it will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled in a time reduction state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 100 IWS 135, when a big hit is made, the initial setting is shown by setting "800" to the relief time reduction number counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big win. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game. can be configured to

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a pre-opening big winning hole timer for measuring the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 100IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N of step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time saving frequency counter (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when it becomes relief time saving, it is controlled to the time saving state of 800 times of time saving times (step 100IWS172, S173 reference). By executing the processing of steps 100, IWS143 and S144, in this example, when the time-saving state is controlled with the relief time-saving as a trigger, 800 times of fluctuation display is executed without becoming a big hit or time-saving failure. Triggered by this, "800" is set to the relief time reduction counter. Then, after that, even if the variable display is executed 800 times, if the next big hit or time-saving failure does not occur, the second relief time-saving is performed and the time-saving state is controlled. In this example, the time saving deviation does not occur in the time saving state triggered by the relief time saving, but it may occur and when it occurs, the value of the relief time saving number counter is reset (that is, "800" is set. ).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (one of the time saving flags A to C) and terminates the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N of step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the variable probability counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the variable probability counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variable number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variable number counter (step 100IWS147), and confirms whether or not the value of the probability variable number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability variable number counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability variable flag and the time saving flag A, and terminates the probability variable state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to terminate lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153.

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS141 to S152, it shows the case where the right-handed notification is terminated while shifting to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period in the time-saving final variation or the probability variable final variation. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to shift to the normal state at the time of start of fluctuation or at the start of the symbol fixed period in the time saving final fluctuation or the probability variable final fluctuation and end the right hitting notification.

In addition, in this example, although it shows the case where the time saving state ends as well as ending the probability changing state in the probability changing final variation, not only such an aspect, only the probability changing state ends and the time saving state continues may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be time saving (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to be out of time saving, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS 154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving number counter if the time saving is out of A (step 100 IWS 155 Y) (step 100IWS156). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure A, CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "50" if it is time saving failure B (step 100IWS157) (step 100IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure B (that is, if it is time saving failure C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving frequency counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 if the time saving deviation A (Y in step 100 IWS 160) ( Step 100 IWS 161). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure A, CPU 103 sets the time saving frequency counter to "200" if it is time saving failure B (step 100IWS162). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure B (that is, if it is time saving failure C), CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving frequency counter (step 100IWS 164). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B to control the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, "800" is set to the relief time-saving number counter with the time-saving loss as a trigger, and even if the fluctuation display is performed 800 times after the time-saving loss, neither the next big hit nor the time-saving loss occurs. , it will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled in a time reduction state.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

By executing the processing of steps 100IWS166 and S168, in this example, when the time saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the symbol fixing period, and the time saving state B designation command is issued. By being transmitted, the background image is switched to the background image corresponding to the time saving state via time saving.

If it is not determined to be time saving (N of step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction number counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction number counter to "800". (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C to control the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state C designation|designated command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 100IWS174).

In this example, it is possible to continuously generate relief time reduction by controlling the time reduction state at the timing of relief time reduction and setting the relief time reduction counter (set "800"). Although it is configured to continue the time saving state until a big hit occurs once the time saving occurs, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, at the timing of the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction number counter is set only by controlling to the time reduction state, and then the relief time reduction number counter is set at the timing of ending the 800-time variable display and controlling to the normal state. (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, "800" is set, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "0". ”, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when setting the relief time-saving number counter, "0" is set, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter is incremented by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter becomes "800". It may be constructed so as to generate relief time reduction based on the fact.

In addition, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, a case is shown in which 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, is set as the symbol determination period to secure the effect period such as the mode transition effect, but the image display device is used during the symbol determination period. In 5, the decoration pattern may not be displayed, and only the small pattern may be displayed so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like.

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS172, it shows the case of setting the same 800 times as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs as the time reduction number, but it is limited to such an aspect do not have. For example, at step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" or a smaller value than "800" may be set to the time saving number counter.

Moreover, in step 100IWS172, the value according to the number of times of a plurality of types of time saving may be set to the time saving number counter. For example, when the first relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "100", and when the second relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "800". good too.

Also, for example, it is configured to determine the number of times of working hours reduction by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 100IWS 172, a value corresponding to the number of times of working hours decided by the lottery process may be set to the number of times of working hours counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of times of time saving may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10%, and may be determined to be 800 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is determined by lottery processing, the number of times of time saving may be determined by using the type determination random number used to determine the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of times of time saving may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(external output signal)
8-18 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of external output signals output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 8-18, in this example, as external output signals, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output. Among them, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output to the outside during the jackpot game. Also, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is externally output during the jackpot game and during the time saving state. Also, the big hit 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the time-saving pattern fixing period. In addition, the big hit 4 signal is a signal that is externally output during the pattern confirmation period of the variable display, which is reduced in relief time. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is externally output at the start of the symbol fixing period.

In this example, in addition to the case of shifting to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game, there is a case where the time saving loss pattern is derived and displayed, so there is a case where the time saving loss pattern is derived and displayed. 2, external output of two jackpot signals is started at the end of the symbol fixing period. In addition, since it may be shifted to the time saving state even when the relief time is shortened, if the missing symbol of the variable display that will be the relief time shortening is derived and displayed, at the end of the symbol fixing period, the big hit 2 signal External output is started.

It should be noted that the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol determination period but also during the big win game. In addition, in this example, a case of outputting separate external output signals (3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) for the case of time saving and the case of relief time saving is shown. may be configured to output

Also, the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be configured to be output at the timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the symbol fixation period.

For example, a variation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the lost symbol, and the big hit 3 signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after outputting the variation stop signal, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. A variation stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern fixing period, and the big win 4 signal may be output during the pattern fixing period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside when the fluctuation stop signal and the big win 3 signal or the big win 4 signal are output at the same time.

Also, the big hit 3 signal may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the time saving loss. Also, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the relief time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably determine the type of time saving even during the time saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 8-19 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 100IWS535. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the big win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 in the big win end display timer (step 100IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

At step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot to be finished this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). It should be noted that whether or not the game is a normal jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving number counter (step 100IWS539). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state A specification command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a variable probability jackpot or a sudden variable probability jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a variable probability flag and controls the variable probability state (step 100IWS541). In addition, the CPU 103 sets "100" to the variable probability counter (step 100IWS542). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the variable probability state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in this characterizing portion 108IW will be described. FIG. 8-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in this characterizing portion 108IW. As shown in FIG. 8-20, in the normal state, if the probability variation jackpot or suddenly probability variation jackpot is controlled to the probability variation state (see step 100IWS541 to S542), and if the normal jackpot becomes time saving state A ( It is controlled to the time saving state via the jackpot) (see step 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even if it is lost in the normal state, if the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via time saving loss) (see step 100IWS166). Furthermore, even if it is lost, if the relief time is reduced (after the RAM clear process, after the big hit or time saving loss, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit or time saving loss) case) is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) (see step 100IWS173).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-20, in the probability variable state, if the probability variable jackpot or suddenly the probability variable jackpot becomes, it is controlled again to the probability variable state (see step 100 IWS541 to S542), and if it becomes a normal jackpot, the time is reduced. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probability variable state, there is no case where the time saving pattern is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS80), and there is no case of relief time saving. Also, in the variable probability state, when the variable display is completed 100 times without the occurrence of a big hit, the control is made to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-20, in the time-saving state A, if the probability variable jackpot or suddenly the probability variable jackpot becomes, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when it becomes a normal jackpot again It is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via the jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Also, in the time-saving state A, even if it is lost, if the time-saving design is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving loss) (see step 100IWS166). Also, in the time-saving state A, when 100 fluctuation displays are completed without the occurrence of a big hit, control is effected to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). On the other hand, in the time saving state A, there is no case of relief time saving.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-20, in the time saving state B, if the probability variable jackpot or suddenly the probability variable jackpot becomes, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and if it becomes a normal jackpot, the time saving It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Also, in the time saving state B, even if it is lost, if the time saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled again to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) (step 100 IWS 166). Also, in the time-saving state A, when 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times of variation display is completed without occurrence of a big hit, control is made to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). However, when the time saving state is shifted to the time saving state B due to the time saving deviation A during the time saving state, the time saving state B is continued until the next big hit occurs (see steps 100IWS160, S161). On the other hand, in the time saving state B, there is no case of relief time saving.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-20, in the time saving state C, when the probability variable jackpot or the probability variable jackpot suddenly occurs, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when it becomes a normal jackpot, the time saving It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, there is no case where the time saving symbols are derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). In addition, in the time saving state C, when the variation display of 800 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled again to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) (step 100IWS170-S173).

In addition, in this example, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed in the time saving state A, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state B, but it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time saving is compared with the number of times of saving time corresponding to the determined type of time saving, and if the remaining number of the current number of times of saving time is larger, the current state of time saving A is continued as it is. may

In addition, in this example, when a normal jackpot occurs in the time saving state B, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A, but it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time saving and the number of times of saving time corresponding to the normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the remaining number of times of the current time saving is larger, continue the current time saving state B as it is It may be configured to

In addition, in this example, there is no case where the time saving pattern is derived and displayed during the time saving state C (see Y in step 100IWS79). , Even in the time saving state C, it may be configured so that it can be determined that the time saving is off.

In addition, in this example, when it is controlled to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is terminated based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state for each variable display by lottery processing, and to end the variable probability state based on the determination to end the variable probability state.

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 8-21 is a flow chart showing a specific example of the effect control main processing in the characterizing section 108IW. In FIG. 8-21, the processes of steps S71-S76 are similar to those processes shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes small symbol process processing (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process processing of step 087IWS701, in the image display device 5, apart from the variable display of the decorative symbols, synchronously with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, In the image display device 5, variable display of small patterns is performed in a form in which the decoration patterns on the left, middle, and right are reduced.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process in step 100IWS702, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the fourth symbol variable display is performed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5. FIG.

The processing of step S77 is the same as the processing of step S77 shown in FIG.

When the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed, the two vertically arranged LEDs in the fourth pattern display units 100IW21a and 21b repeat turning on and off alternately, thereby executing the variable display of the fourth pattern. be done.

In addition, when the fluctuation time ends, the stopped design of the fourth design is fixedly displayed at the start of the design fixing period. In this case, when a big win is achieved, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the big win symbols are stopped and displayed in red light. In addition, when the time saving is lost, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the time saving pattern are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in blue. In addition, when it becomes a loss (no time saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below as a loss symbol (no time saving) are stopped and displayed in an extinguished state.

In addition, the mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. good too.

In addition, in this example, the case of providing a dedicated pattern as a time-saving loss pattern of the fourth pattern is shown, but not limited to such an aspect, the stop pattern of the fourth pattern in the case of a big hit and in the case of a time-saving loss. may be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 8-22 and 8-23 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main substrate 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 100IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618 ).

The received effect control command is any of the design determination designation commands (first design determination A designation command, first design determination B designation command, first design determination C designation command, second design determination A designation command, second design determination B designation command, second design determination C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a determination command reception flag corresponding to the received design determination designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first symbol decision B designation command is received, the first decision B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol decision B designation command is received, the second decision B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 1 designation command (step 100IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command in the relief time reduction number 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command in the relief time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a restoration time reduction time number designation command (step 100IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the received restoration time relief time reduction number designation command, in the image display device 5, until the relief time reduction Control is performed to display the initial outcome according to the number of times (step 100IWS630). For example, if the EXT data of the received restoration time reduction number designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times or less), "112" as the initial output is displayed, suggesting that the number of remaining variations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "02 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction is 101 times or more and 200 times or less), the initial "223" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received restoration time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining fluctuation number until relief time reduction is 701 times or more and 800 times or less), the initial "889" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 701 times or more and 800 times or less.

In addition, not only when displaying the initial output that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations at the time of power restoration, for example, in the first fluctuation display after power restoration, the display that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened , a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations may be displayed. Also, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after power restoration, display suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or display a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations. It may be configured such that the suggestive display is performed at a relatively early stage. Also, it may be configured not to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened by the initial eye (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, until the relief time is shortened by the initial eye) The number of remaining fluctuations may not be suggested).

If the received effect control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode). (step 100IWS632).

If the received production control command is the time saving state A designation command (step 100IWS633), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, the sunset A yellow background image corresponding to the mode) is controlled (step 100IWS634).

If the received production control command is the time saving state B designation command (step 100IWS635), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, A green background image corresponding to the forest mode) is controlled (step 100IWS636).

If the received production control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100IWS637), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even in the same time-saving state, whether it is the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, or the time-saving state via the relief time-saving state display different background images depending on the With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the difference in the game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

In addition, not only the aspect shown in this example, regardless of whether the time saving state via the big hit, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving, to display a common background image may be configured. For example, a common background image is displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image is displayed in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. can be configured to

If the received effect control command is a variable probability state designation command (step 100IWS639), the effect control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image corresponding to the variable probability state (for example, the red background image corresponding to the flame mode) (step 100IWS640).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol determination period when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed or when the relief time is shortened (see steps 100IWS1126, S1134). , Lighting of the right hitting notification LED 100IW20 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 stores the received production control command and executes processing for setting a flag corresponding to the received production control command (step 100IWS645 ). For example, in the case of receiving a large winning opening winning designation command, a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a large winning opening has been won is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demonstration effect control processing)
FIG. 8-24 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting demonstration effect control process. As described above, in this example, at the end of the pattern fixing period and the end of the big hit game, when the pending memory is not stored (that is, when the total pending memory number is 0), the effect control board from the main board 11 12, a customer waiting demonstration specification command is transmitted.

When the customer-waiting demo designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer-waiting demo designation command, and when 10 seconds elapse without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of start winning. (Y in step 105IWS250), the telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105IWS251).

In this example, it is possible to perform a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is installed during the period in which the variable display is not performed. At step 105 IWS 251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display a telop.

FIG. 8-25 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. 8-25, FIG. 8-25 (A) is a telop display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and FIG. 8-25 (B) is the setting value This is a telop display execution lottery table used when "6" is set.

As shown in FIGS. 8-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the rate at which telops are displayed during customer waiting differs depending on the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened depending on the presence or absence of a telop display during customer waiting.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the rate at which telop display is performed during customer waiting is configured to differ depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous set value is set depending on whether there is a telop display during customer waiting.

Although FIG. 8-25 shows examples of setting values 1 and 6 for simplification of explanation, a table corresponding to each setting value may be provided, or a plurality of tables may be provided. A table corresponding to the set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is decided to execute the telop display (Y of step 105IWS252), the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, telop display is started (step 105IWS254).

In this example, it is possible to perform telop display with a red rendering mode and a blue rendering mode. At step 105 IWS 253, the effect mode of the telop display is decided by lottery.

FIG. 8-25(C) is a telop mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and FIG. It is a telop mode determination lottery table used when there is.

As shown in FIGS. 8-25 (C) and (D), in this example, the effect mode of the telop display displayed during customer waiting is configured to differ depending on the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened by the production mode of the telop display during customer waiting.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-25(C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the telop display displayed during customer waiting is configured to differ depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous set value is set depending on the effect mode of the telop display during customer waiting.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when 3 minutes elapse without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of start winning (Y in step 105 IWS 255), the effect control CPU 120 starts the demonstration. The movie is reproduced (step 105IWS256).

It should be noted that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie while waiting for the customer are terminated when the effect control command or the like at the time of start-up winning is received.

FIG. 8-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of telop display. In the example shown in FIG. 8-26, the screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C) or in the order of (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIG. 8-26(A), if the reserved memory is not stored when the symbol fixing period has passed, the main board 11 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command to the effect control board 12.

Then, 10 seconds pass without receiving any other command such as the production control command at the time of start winning after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the side of the production control board 12, and the telop display of the customer waiting is displayed. When it is decided to carry out, the image display device 5 displays a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is installed.

At this time, if it is decided to display a telop display in a blue rendering mode, a telop display 108IW001 with a blue border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 8-26(B), the border is white). ). In addition, when it is decided to display a telop display in the red effect mode, a telop display 108IW002 with a red border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 8-26(D), a black border form).

Then, when 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other command such as the effect control command at the time of start winning after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the side of the effect control board 12, the image display device 5 starts the demonstration. A movie is played. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 8-26(C) and (E), the telop display is continuously displayed even during the reproduction of the demonstration movie.

(Prefetching notice setting processing)
FIG. 8-27 is a flow chart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the effect control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the starting winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result and a variation pattern is executed. Then, after storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as occurrence of start winning, the number of pending memories, prefetching determination etc. to the effect control board 12 is set. done. The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

In the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), for example, based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-27, the effect control CPU 120 provides a effect control command at the time of the start winning (for example, the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the look-ahead determination ) is received (step 108 IWS 701).

When the effect control command at the time of starting winning is received, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of pending memories including the pending memory that newly received the effect control command at the time of starting winning is greater than the remaining number of times until relief time reduction. It is determined whether or not there are many (step 108IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is to be executed after the relief time is shortened. And when the number of pending memories is not greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed after the relief time is shortened. , the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

In this example, by executing the process of step 108IWS702, among the variable display corresponding to the pending memory stored before the relief time reduction, the variable display when the relief time reduction is to be the notice target pre-reading notice effect While it is executable, execution of a look-ahead forewarning effect whose foretelling target is the variable display subsequent to the variable display when the relief time is shortened is restricted. That is, it is configured to limit the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect straddling the relief time reduction in which the game state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the contents of the presentation.

If the number of pending memories is greater than the remaining number of times until the time saving, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed before the time saving is achieved, The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and determines the effect type and effect mode in the case of execution (step 108IWS703).

FIG. 8-28 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading advance notice effect execution determination table, a pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and a pre-reading notice effect mode determination table. In step 108 IWS 703, each table shown in FIG. 8-28 is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the effect type and effect mode in the case of execution.

Specifically, when the game state is a state different from the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the pre-reading notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 8-28 (A). Then, when the game state is the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the pre-reading notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 8-28(B).

As shown in FIGS. 8-28(A) and 8-28(B), in this example, it is possible to execute the look-ahead forewarning effect in both cases of the display result being a big win and a case of losing the big win. It is configured so that the proportion of execution of the pre-reading notice effect is higher in the case of becoming than in the case of losing. Therefore, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high by executing the look-ahead foretelling effect.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 (A) and (B), the time saving state C is more than the game state other than the time saving state C When the display result is out In addition, it is configured so that the proportion of execution of the look-ahead forewarning effect is low. With such a configuration, in the case of the time-saving state C (that is, when the big win is not generated for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest when the big win is not achieved though the look-ahead advance notice performance is executed.

In step 108 IWS703, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, if the game state is a state different from the time saving state C, execution is performed using the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 8-28 (C) Determine the effect type of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed, and when the game state is the time saving state C, use the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 8-28 (D). Determine the type. Specifically, as the type of effect, either the chance effect or the pending change effect is determined.

The chance eye effect is a variable display to be the target of the look-ahead forewarning effect when the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display to be the target of the foreseeing forewarning effect becomes the chance eye ("778" in this example). It is a production that suggests that will be a big hit. In the chance eye effect, for example, an effect is executed to encourage whether or not the display result will be the chance eye (“778” in this example). Further, for example, when the chance game effect is executed in the red color effect mode, the red chance game effect ("778" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and when the blue chance game effect is executed in the blue effect mode. , a blue chance number (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The pending change effect suggests that the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice effect will be a big hit by displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice effect in a display mode different from the normal mode. It is a performance to do. Further, for example, when the pending change effect is executed in the red effect mode, a red pending display is displayed, and when the pending change effect is executed in the blue effect mode, the blue pending display is displayed. be done.

FIG. 8-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each effect type of the look-ahead preview effect. Of FIG. 8-29, FIGS. 8-29 (A1) to (E1) show a specific example of the chance eye production, and FIGS. 8-29 (A2) to (B2) show a specific holding change production This is an example.

When the chance eye effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, one variable display is started as shown in FIG. 8-29 (A1), and then shown in FIGS. As shown, left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (D1), the center decorative pattern stops at either "7" which is the chance number "778" or "6" which is not the chance number "778". is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (E1), when the center decorative symbol "7" is stopped and the chance number "778" is stopped and displayed, a variable display that becomes a big hit is displayed in the reserved memory. It would suggest that there may be a corresponding reserved memory. It should be noted that there may be a case where a pattern (for example, "768") different from the chance number "778" is stopped and displayed after the stimulating effect is executed.

When a pending change effect is executed as a pre-reading notice effect, as shown in FIGS. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), suggesting the possibility that a variable display that will result in a big win will be executed based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display. In this example, the display mode of the pending display is taken over as the display mode of the active display. Regarding the pending change effect, it is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. You may make it change to the display mode different from a normal mode.

FIG. 8-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the advance notice effect in the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the relief. Of FIGS. 8-30, FIG. 8-30 (A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time-saving state via the big hit and the execution period of the predictive advance notice effect, and FIG. 8-30 (B) is a time chart. , It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the pre-reading notice effect. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-30 (A) and (B), it is assumed that the starting winnings occur at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 8-30(A), when the chance eye effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, in the variable display executed from the time when the starting prize is generated until the variable display of the pre-reading target is started , an effect to arouse whether or not the chance symbol is stopped is executed, and then the chance symbol is stopped and displayed. Since such a stimulating effect is included, it is necessary to secure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one variable display when executing the chance effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A), when executing a pending change effect as a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display of the pre-reading target is displayed from the timing when the starting prize occurs or the time when the starting prize occurs. The display mode of the pending display (or active display) changes at any timing over a plurality of variable displays until the end. The display of the suspended display and active display in the post-change display mode is continued until the variable display of the prefetch target ends. That is, when executing the pending change effect, it can be executed at any timing from the time when the start winning occurs until the variable display of the prefetch target ends, and it continues until the variable display of the prefetch target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead advance notice effect, the execution period differs between the chance effect and the pending change effect. That is, the chance eye effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, two seconds) during one variable display, whereas the pending change effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays.

Also, as described above, in the time-saving state via the jackpot, ultra-super-shortening variation (1.5 seconds) is not performed when the loss is performed, and mainly shortening variation (5 seconds) is performed, but the time-saving state via relief In , ultra-ultrashortening variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly performed at the time of detachment. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-30, it is difficult to ensure the period for executing the chance effect in the time-saving state via relief.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 (C) and (D), in the time saving state via the big hit, both the chance eye effect and the pending change effect can be executed as the pre-reading notice effect. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, the execution of the chance eye production is restricted as the look-ahead notice production, and only the pending change production can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the pre-reading announcement effect according to the game state.

Also, in step 108IWS703, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, if the game state is in a state different from the time saving state C, the pre-reading notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 8-28 (E) is used. , Determine the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed, and when the game state is the time saving state C, using the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 8-28 (D), Pre-reading notice effect to be executed Determines the type of production of . Specifically, either the red rendering mode or the blue rendering mode is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 8-28 (E) and (F), in this example, it is possible to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect by the red effect mode and the blue effect mode, and the big hit is more likely to be lost. It is configured such that the proportion of execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect in the red effect mode is higher than in the case of . Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the look-ahead foretelling effect in the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 8-28 (E) and (F), in the time-saving state C, it is configured to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect only in the red effect mode. With such a configuration, in the case of the time-saving state C (that is, when the big win has not occurred for a long time), the deterioration of interest when the look-ahead advance notice performance is executed by the blue performance mode with a low expectation of the big win is suppressed. be able to. In this example, in the time-saving state C, the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed only in the red effect mode, but when it is lost, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, it is configured so as not to frequently cause the display result to be incorrect even though the look-ahead foretelling effect is executed in the red effect mode.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in FIG. It is possible to vary the execution ratio of effects and the ratio of the type of effects and the mode of effects, thereby improving interest.

In this example, as will be described later, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 times or less, the execution of the notice effect is restricted (even if only the notice effect with high expectation is not executed) good), but the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is also restricted (for example, the execution ratio may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the case of loss The ratio may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution ratio of the type of anticipation with high degree of expectation may be reduced (or not executed).

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-28, for example, even in the time-saving state C, when a variable display that results in a big hit or a time-saving loss is executed, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited. good too.

When the process of step 108IWS704 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the pre-reading notice effect based on the determined contents (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is decided to execute the chance game effect, in step 108 IWS 704, the chance game flag is set as the execution setting of the chance game effect. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process, which will be described later, if the chance flag is set, the chance game effect is executed by selecting the process table including the chance game effect. The chance flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the pending change effect, in step 108IWS704, the pending change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-31 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 100IWS802, selects a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol for the pseudo-run. , a combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern) is also determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

In step 100IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 selects a decoration pattern in which three patterns are the same even number pattern as a stop pattern. A combination (usually a big hit pattern) is determined. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probability variable big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decoration patterns (probability variable big hit pattern) in which 3 patterns are the same odd number patterns as the stop pattern. do. Further, when the received display result specifying command indicates "suddenly variable probability big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of "135" decoration symbols (suddenly variable probability big hit symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. It should be noted that it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and diamond-shaped symbols) according to the time-saving type. Also, when the execution setting of the chance game effect is performed, the combination of decorative symbols of the chance game symbols (“778” in this example) is determined.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, a stop pattern (a combination of patterns in which the left, middle, and right are all the same pattern) that reminds us of a big win is called a big hit pattern. In addition, among the jackpot patterns, a stop pattern (combination of patterns in which the left, middle and right are all the same odd-numbered patterns) reminiscent of the probability variation jackpot is called the probability variation jackpot pattern. In addition, among the jackpot patterns, a stop pattern (combination of patterns in which the left, middle and right are all the same even-numbered patterns) reminiscent of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot pattern. Also, a stop symbol that reminds us of a loss is called a lost symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As the advance notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and a effect image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed when the count number becomes "0", and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is performed. may be set to execute.

FIG. 8-32 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table. In step 108IWS802A, if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction exceeds 10 times, the presence or absence of execution of the notice performance is determined using the notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. If the remaining number of times is 10 or less, the presence or absence of the execution of the announcement effect is determined using the announcement effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 8-32(B). Also, when it is decided to execute the notice effect, if the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction exceeds 10, the notice effect effect mode is determined using the notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 8-32 (C) However, when the remaining number of times until the relief time saving is 10 or less, the mode of the announcement effect is determined using the announcement effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 8-32(D).

As shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and (B), in this example, the announcement effect can be executed in both cases of the display result being a big win and a case of losing. It is configured so that the proportion of execution of the advance notice effect is higher in the case of failure than in the case of failure. Therefore, execution of the advance notice effect suggests that the expectation of a big win is high.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and (B), a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) Compared to the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until relief time reduction exceeds 10), the proportion of executing the notice effect when the display result is wrong is lower. is configured as With this configuration, a predetermined period before the relief time is reduced (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less, and the countdown effect and effect effect described later are performed). It is possible to suppress the decline in interest when the game is executed but does not result in a big hit.

In addition, in a predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less), the countdown production and effect production described later are executed. By restricting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counter, and prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 8-32 (C) and (D), in this example, a red effect mode (for example, a red effect image is displayed) and a blue effect mode (for example, a blue effect image is displayed). is displayed), and the ratio of executing the advance notice performance by the red performance mode is higher in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. Therefore, execution of the advance notice effect in the red effect mode suggests that the expectation of a big win is high.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (C) and (D), a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) If the display result is lost more than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction exceeds 10), the notice effect is executed in the red effect mode. It is configured so that the percentage of With such a configuration, in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less), although the notice performance is executed in the red performance mode, the interest when it does not become a big hit can suppress the decrease in

In addition, when it is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of notice effects with different degrees of expectation for big hits, the notice effects for types with high expectations for big hits (for example, when the degrees of expectation for big hits are classified into five levels, Only the announcement performance of the type with the fourth stage or higher of the expected degree of jackpot) is restricted to be executed in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). good too.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-32, for example, even if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 or less, when the variable display that results in a big hit or time reduction is executed, the execution of the notice effect is performed. You may make it not restrict.

Also, as described above, in this example, in the case of the time saving state C, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted, but the execution of the notice effect is also restricted (for example, the execution ratio is reduced In this case, it may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the execution ratio of the notice effect in the case of failure, or the notice effect of the type with high expectation The execution ratio may be lowered (or not executed).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times. (step 100IWS803). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times is, for example, the relief time reduction number 2 It can be determined by confirming whether or not the designated command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times, the effect control CPU 120 until relief time reduction selects a process table including a fanning effect corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations (step 100IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times), the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" Select a process table that includes the corresponding teasing effect. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 800 times), the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times selects the process table including the inciting effect corresponding to ". Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is none of 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, and 800 times, the effect control CPU 120 is the relief time reduction. It is checked whether or not the number of remaining fluctuations until the value reaches 0 (step 108IWS805). Whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 is determined, for example, by checking whether the EXT data value of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 0. I can judge.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display result is a big hit (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush effect that notifies control to a time-saving state by relief time-saving (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the game is controlled to the time saving state as the relief time saving by the time saving rush performance, and to improve the interest in the time of the relief time saving.

On the other hand, when the display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush appearance effect for notifying that the big win will be achieved after executing the effect in the same manner as the time-saving rush effect ( Step 100 IWS 806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the number of remaining fluctuations has become 0 until the relief time is shortened, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness. Interest can be improved.

In this example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of times of relief time-saving variation is reached, a time-saving rush effect is executed using a dedicated relief time-saving variation big hit variation pattern. For example, even if a full rotation effect (that is, a big hit is confirmed) that fluctuates while the three decorative patterns are aligned, which is not executed except when the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuation is reached, is executed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and to improve the interest.

In addition, for example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the big hit as usual may be used, or a ready-to-win effect with a short fluctuation time may be specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the display result is lost when the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuation is reached, a dedicated relief time-saving fluctuation loss-use variation pattern is used, but not limited to such a mode, for example, A variation pattern for losing the same as usual may be used, or a variation pattern designating a ready-to-win effect with a short variation time may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to share the variation pattern before and when reaching the number of times of variation of the relief time reduction, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. In this case, after the symbol confirmation period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and the background image (in this example, orange color (Background image of display color) (see step 078IWS638), it is possible to notify that the change of the background image is controlled to the time saving state by relief time saving.

When the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less ( step 108 IWS 807). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less is determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less. can be determined by

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including countdown effects and effect effects according to the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction. (step 108 IWS 808). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 times), the count number until relief time reduction " 10", select the process table including the countdown presentation and effect presentation. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 1 time), the count until relief time reduction A process table including countdown presentation and effect presentation corresponding to the number "1" is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

In this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown presentation and the effect presentation are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the game will be a relief variation, and to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the relief fluctuation.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Although shown, it is not limited to such embodiments. For example, when configuring to transmit a background designation command that designates a background image, configure the EXT data of the background designation command to set a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and transmit. may On the side of the effect control CPU 120, the number of remaining fluctuations may be determined based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and a fanning effect or a countdown effect may be executed.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown presentation and effect presentation are always executed. You may make it determine whether. Also, for example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is not 10 times or less, the so-called false countdown production and effect production (for example, the countdown production and effect production are performed in a common manner) , the countdown presentation and the effect presentation corresponding to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but interrupted in the middle (see FIG. 8-42). good too. In this case, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown production and effect production (genuine and fake) are better than when it is not 10 times or less. ) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the game will be a relief variation, and to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the relief fluctuation.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not less than 10 times (N in step 108IWS807), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution setting of the chance effect is performed (step 108IWS809). If the setting for execution of the chance game effect is set, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including the chance game effect (including a chance game effect) (step 108 IWS 810). . In addition, if the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not performed, the effect that the chance eye symbol is not displayed stop after executing the effect to instigate whether it will be the chance eye effect (so-called false chance eye effect) is executed by lottery. You may make it decide whether to carry out.

When the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 108IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls such that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIGS. 8-33 and 8-34 are flowcharts showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next process timer set value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol determination A designation command or the second symbol determination A designation command is received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed A command reception flag or the second fixed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A specified command or the second symbol confirmation A specified command is received, the effect control CPU 120 is a mode transition effect (effect to inform that it shifts to a time saving state (time saving mode)) and right hitting A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 100IWS849). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time saving is lost in the normal state and the case where the relief time is shortened. However, in step 100IWS847, when the time saving is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time saving and the right-handed notification is selected, and when the relief time is shortened, the relief time saving is selected. A process table is selected according to the mode transition effect and the right hitting notification. Whether or not it is a case where the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as a relief time reduction, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "00 ( H)” can be determined.

If neither the first design determination A designation command nor the second design determination A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first design determination B designation command or the second design determination B designation command. (step 100IWS851). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed B command reception flag or the second fixed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination B designation command or the second symbol determination B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the continuous effect (effect for notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 100 IWS 852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 100IWS854). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (step 100IWS856). Specifically, it is checked whether the first fixed C command reception flag or the second fixed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination C designation command or the second symbol determination C designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol determination C designation command nor the second symbol determination C designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y of step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer times out (Y of step 100IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 normally (step 100IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 100IWS860). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 second to a fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the pattern confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the processing after step 100IWS858 is shifted to the pattern confirmation period. Normally, however, if the design decision designating command is not missed, there is no case where it is judged as Y in step 100IWS857 to shift to the processing after step 100IWS858.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Waiting process per special figure)
FIG. 8-35 is a flow chart showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 100IWS871), and confirms whether the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 100 IWS 872). If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS874).

Also, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stationary symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed (step 100IWS878). If the fixed display of the stop pattern of the decoration pattern is in progress, the process is terminated as it is. If the stop pattern of the decoration pattern is not being confirmed and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop pattern (loss pattern (no time reduction), time reduction loss pattern, big hit pattern) (step 100IWS879). ).

When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the pattern fixed period has passed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has received a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS883). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command is not received, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the jackpot including the mode transition effect (effect for notifying the transition to the variable probability state (variable probability mode) and the short time state (short time mode)) and the notification of hitting to the right. (step 100IWS885). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speaker 27 as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS887).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, if the losing pattern (no time saving) or the time saving losing pattern is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag to variable display start waiting processing. (Step S170) is updated (Step 100IWS889).

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time will be described. FIG. 8-36 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. As shown in Figure 8-36, in the variable display (the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1) immediately before the variable display that will be the relief time reduction, the variable display of the special design and the decorative design is finished, and the design (no time reduction) When is stopped and displayed, the lost symbol (no time reduction) is determined and displayed for a symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is performed (see step 100IWS74, S75). (See step 108 IWS 806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the winning symbols (no time saving) are stopped and displayed, the winning symbols (no time saving) are fixedly displayed for a pattern fixing period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS1135). Also, during the pattern fixing period, as shown in FIG. 8-36, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the symbol fixing period, as shown in FIG. 8-36, the image display device 5 starts hitting to the right (see step 100IWS847). Then, when the pattern confirmation period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 8-36, in the image display device 5, the background image (this example Then, the background image is switched to an orange display color (see step 100 IWS 638). With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and the clarification of the production when switching the game state can be achieved. can be improved.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until transition to the time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be described. FIGS. 8-37 to 8-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until transition to the time saving state. In addition, in FIGS. 8-37 to 8-40, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 8-37(A), the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbols are stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and a small pattern 100IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when the remaining 800 rotations are left until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are stopped and the missing symbol (in this example, a combination of "134" symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 saying "Relief time saving starts after 800 rotations!" is displayed on the upper left. In addition, at this time, the explanation about the relief time saving (for example, the explanation of the relief time saving function and the effect of the relief time saving) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of understanding of the player regarding the specifications of the gaming machine with the relief time reduction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), for example, when the remaining 700 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are stopped and removed (in this example, "423" ) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 8-37(A), a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 saying "Relief time saving start after 700 rotations!" is displayed on the upper left. In addition, at this time, the explanation about the relief time saving (for example, the explanation of the relief time saving function and the effect of the relief time saving) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the telop display 100IW103.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-37 (A) and (B), it shows the case of executing every 100 fluctuations of the inciting production that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time saving, but that It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 400 times to 800 times does not perform the fanning effect, and the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (therefore, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times). can be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning production when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when the command for specifying the number of relief time reduction times 2 is received, lottery processing based on random numbers is performed, and when it is decided to execute the fanning production The configuration may be such that the fan effect is executed in the mode shown in FIGS. 8-37(A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure such that as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases, the execution ratio of the fanning effect increases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-37 (C) to 8-38 (E), after the remaining 10 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the remaining number of rotations is displayed in the center of the screen. be. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed each time the symbol variation display ends and the symbols stop. Each figure shows an example in which the winning symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844" and "123") are derived and displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-37 (C) to 8-38 (E), after the remaining 10 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the effect display 100IW104B in the range according to the remaining number of rotations is displayed. . In this example, as the number of remaining rotations decreases (that is, as the relief time reduction approaches), the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number of displayed effects increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-38 (E), there is one rotation left until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed variably, and the pattern stops and the design (in this example, It is assumed that a symbol combination of "123") is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-38 (F), the remaining 0 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 (that is, the variable display that reduces the relief time) is started. As shown in FIG. 8-38 (G), a time-saving rush effect for notifying that control is to be performed in a time-saving state (relief time-saving) is started, and a time-saving rush effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the control is to be in the time saving state (relief time saving), and to improve the interest in the time saving state (relief time saving).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-38 (G), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decoration pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-38(H), when the symbols are stopped, the decoration symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, a combination of "254" symbols) is derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving rush effect, it is possible to make a notification that is generally performed during the ending period of the first game, such as a warning notification for forgetting to take a prepaid card or a warning notification to prevent addiction, or a game machine manufacturer's logo. may be displayed. In this case, at the time of notification in the time-saving rush effect, the notification may be performed in the same manner as at the time of notification in the ending period of the first win, or in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may be performed during the ending period of the first big hit after shifting to the time-saving state by relief time-saving rather than in the time-saving rush performance.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-39(I), when the game moves to the symbol fixing period, a mode effect start display 100IW105 saying "Super heat!" is displayed, and the mode change effect is started. After that, the decoration pattern 100IW100 is not displayed even in the mode transition effect, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, an operation suggesting image 100IW 106 suggesting that the push button 31B (see FIG. 8-1) is operated (depressed) is displayed. be. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, an image prompting the user to press the push button 31B is displayed along with the characters "Press".

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggesting image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the operation suggesting image 100IW106 is displayed, "V A character display 100IW107 reading "STOCK x 1" is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction is started. Also, a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

It should be noted that, in this example, even when a big hit is achieved, an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK×1" can be executed in the same manner as in FIG. 8-39(K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), in the start-up winning determination process (step S101), performs a prefetch determination process of whether or not it will be a big hit and the variation pattern type, and performs a prefetch determination. Send a prefetch determination result specifying command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect (so-called holding continuous effect) similar to that of FIG. 8-39(K) based on the received prefetch determination result specifying command. For example, when it is specified that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to perform the pending continuous effect. to run. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two jackpots in the pending memory based on the received prefetch determination result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to hold. Execute a series of performances.

On the other hand, when the relief time is reduced, there is a high probability that a variable display with an extremely short variation time of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see Figure 8-8 (E) ), the variable display is digested very quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the design confirmation period), which has become a relief time reduction, the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 8-39 (K) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 8-39 (K) has the same effect as the pseudo holding continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production that informs.

Although the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 of "V STOCK×1", the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 may be started at the timing of the fixed display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 8-38(H), and various modes are conceivable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 for selecting a production mode for saving time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes AD is displayed. Mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. In addition, when a predetermined time has passed without selecting the presentation mode, the presentation mode in which the cursor is matched is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 for notifying that the relief time saving is started is displayed. For example, the characters "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, it shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rush appearance production will be described. FIG. 8-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the time-saving rush appearance effect. The example shown in FIG. 8-41 follows the example of FIGS. 8-37(A)-(D).

As shown in FIG. 8-41 (E), there is one rotation left until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed, and the pattern stops and is removed (in this example, "123 ) is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (F'), the remaining 0 rotations are left until the shift to the relief time reduction, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is started. It should be noted that this variable display is a relief time reduction, but the display result is a big hit. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, there is no transition to the time-saving state due to the relief time-saving, and the game is shifted to the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (G′), the time-saving rush appearance effect is started, and the time-saving rush effect display 100IW104C in the same mode as the time-saving rush effect is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (G′), when the time saving rush effect is started, the decoration pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed in the same way as when the time saving rush effect is started. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (H), when the display of the time saving rush effect display 100IW104C ends, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed when the pattern is stopped, and the small pattern 100IW101 (in this example, the “254” pattern ) are derived and displayed. The variable display of the decoration symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 is stopped, and the big hit symbol (in this example, a combination of "777" symbols) is derived and displayed. After that, it shifts to a big hit game. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time saving, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

In addition, the structure of this characterizing part 108IW is also executed to control a jackpot game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the jackpot during the small winning game. In the case of application to a game machine configured to be able to do so, when the display result of the variable display for saving time is a small hit, the time-saving rush appearance performance is executed to notify the small win. good too.

Next, a description will be given of the so-called fake countdown presentation and effect presentation. FIG. 8-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the so-called fake countdown presentation and effect presentation.

As shown in Figure 8-42 (A) ~ (C), at the time of remaining 49 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called fake countdown effect is executed, so that the remaining number of rotations is 10 times. A countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the case is displayed in the center of the screen. A countdown from "10" is displayed each time the symbols are stopped after the variable display of the symbols is completed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-42 (A) to (C), at the time when the remaining 49 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called fake effect production is executed, so that the remaining number of rotations is 10. An effect display 100IW 104B having a range corresponding to the number of times is displayed. Then, each time the symbol variation display ends and the symbols stop, the effect display 100IW 104B is displayed so as to widen the display range (the number of displayed symbols increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-42 (E), the countdown display 100IW 104A and the effect display 100IW 104B are displayed before the display is performed in a manner corresponding to the case where the remaining number of rotations is one until the shift to the relief time reduction. is terminated. At this time, since the number of rotations remaining until the shift to the relief time reduction is not 0, the time reduction rush effect is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-42, when the so-called fake countdown production and effect production are configured to be executable, the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is shown in FIGS. It is also possible not to execute the inciting effect suggesting that. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW 104A and the effect display 100IW 104B are displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish between the genuine article and the counterfeit article.

In this example, when the symbols are stopped, the number of rotations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time shortening is explained, and the countdown is displayed.

In addition, in this example, the pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in the variable display that shortens the relief time, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect etc.

In addition, this example shows the case where the relief time reduction counter is initially set to "800" when the RAM clearing process is executed, when the time saving is lost, and when the time saving is lost. or high-speed variation), the selection buffer and story counter of the story may be cleared. In addition, the story may be configured to be settable when the relief time reduction is activated, or a different story may be configured to be settable according to the game state.

(Modification 1)
In the characteristic portion 108IW described above, in the variable display that shortens the relief time, 20 seconds, which is longer than the usual 0.5 seconds, is set as the symbol determination period, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are performed during the symbol determination period. Although shown, such processing is not limited. For example, the design determination period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period is provided until the next fluctuation is started, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are executed during the postponement period. You may Modification 1 will be described below, in which mode transition effect and right-handed notification are performed by providing a postponement period until the start of the next variation.

FIG. 8-43 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol process processing in Modification 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-43, in the modified example 1, in addition to the processing shown in FIG. 5, in the special symbol process processing, the next variation postponement processing (step 100IWS114) is included. It should be noted that in Modification 1, the starting winning determination process (step 100IWS101) is executed in the same manner as the starting winning determination process (step 101) shown in FIG.

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". Also, the variation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". Also, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". Also, the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3".

Also, the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4".

Also, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". Also, the process during jackpot opening (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". Also, the jackpot opening post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Also, the jackpot end process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8".

Also, the small hit opening preprocessing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In addition, the small hit during opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". Also, the small hit end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "11".

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) are the same as the special symbol normal process (step S110) and the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. is. In addition, in the modification 1, in the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113), even if the relief time is shortened, the symbol determination period is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as usual. , differs from the special symbol variation process (step S112) and the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG.

It should be noted that, in the modification 1, the big hit opening pre-processing (step 100IWS115) ~ small hitting end processing (step 100IWS121) is the processing of the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114) ~ small hitting end processing (step S120) shown in FIG. is similar to

FIG. 8-44 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in Modification 1. FIG. In Modification 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 8-16 and 8-17. In modification 1, when the relief time reduction determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the next fluctuation starts (20 seconds in this example). is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). The processing of step 100IWS175 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 8-17.

FIG. 8-45 is a flow chart showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in Modification 1. FIG. In the next fluctuation postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and confirms whether or not the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). . If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the relief time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C to control the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

It should be noted that, in the modification 1, in the next fluctuation postponement process, the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation (in this example, 20 seconds) shows the case of transitioning to the time saving state at the timing that has passed, such It is not limited to modes. For example, it may be configured to perform right-handed notification in the next fluctuation postponement process, and to shift to the time saving state at the start of the postponement period until the next fluctuation starts or in the middle of the postponement period. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, it may be configured to perform right-handed notification while controlling to the time-saving state, or may be configured to perform only right-handed notification without controlling to the time-saving state. can be considered.

Further, in Modification 1, the case of uniformly measuring 20 seconds as the postponement period in the next fluctuation postponement process has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set "800") at the time of the relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction is configured to occur continuously, when the relief time reduction occurs during the normal state and the time reduction A different postponement period may be set for the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, if the relief time is shortened during the time saving state, a shorter postponement period is set compared to the case of the relief time shortening during the normal state, and it is measured in the next variable postponement process, and the relief time is shortened from the second time onwards. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Also, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decoration pattern, but displays only the small pattern so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like. good too.

In addition, in the modified example 1, the case of extending the period until the next fluctuation is started by executing the next fluctuation postponement process when the relief time is shortened is shown, but not only such an aspect, the fluctuation display of the time saving is out may also be applied, and the next fluctuation postponement process similar to that of Modification 1 may be executed to extend the period until the next fluctuation is started.

Further, as described above, when applying to variable display for time saving, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 8-17 may be configured to be executed in the next variable postponement processing. With such a configuration, the pattern fixing period of the variable display in the case of time saving loss can be made common to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal variable display, and the processing related to right-handed notification etc. can be executed in the same process as

FIG. 8-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in Modification 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-46, in the modification 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display to be a relief time reduction (the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1), the variable display of the special design and the decorative design is ended, and the When the symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the lost symbol (no time saving) is fixedly displayed for a pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is performed (see step 100IWS74, S75). (See step 108 IWS 806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the lost symbols (no time saving) are stopped and displayed, the missing symbols (no time saving) are fixedly displayed for the same 0.5 second pattern fixing period as usual (step 078IWS1135). reference). Next, when the 0.5 second pattern fixing period ends, as shown in FIG. 8-46, the game shifts to the next fluctuation postponement period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS114). Then, during the next fluctuation postponement period, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-46. Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the next fluctuation postponement period, as shown in FIG. 8-46, the image display device 5 starts hitting to the right. Then, when the next fluctuation postponement period has passed, it is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 8-46, in the image display device 5, the background image (this In the example, the background image is switched to an orange display color).

In the case of configuring as in Modification 1, a fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the design confirmation period of the lost pattern, and after the symbol confirmation period has passed, at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (that is, the next fluctuation postponement period At the start of the game, four jackpot signals may be output. The 4 jackpot signals here are signals to be externally output during the next fluctuation postponement period after the fluctuation display pattern confirmation period, which is a relief time reduction. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside when the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals are output at the same time.

In addition, in the case of the configuration as in Modification 1, when the next fluctuation postponement process starts (that is, when the next fluctuation postponement period starts), the player is in a game state in which it is assumed that he will hit to the right. You may make it output the test signal and external output signal which show, and you may make it start right-handed alerting|reporting. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to hitting to the right and to report hitting to the right at appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the above characteristic portion 108IW, during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 8-8 (E)) is uniformly selected to change the high-speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds. Although the case of displaying is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. Hereinafter, modifications 2 to 4 in which the selection method of the variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving is different will be described. FIG. 8-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining modifications 2 to 4 of the variation pattern selection method during the time saving state based on the relief time saving, the modification 8-37.

First, with reference to FIG. 8-47 (A), the selection method of the variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving in Modification 2 will be described. In the above characteristic portion 108IW, after the RAM clearing process (without being a big hit or time saving), 800 times of fluctuation display is executed, or after a big hit or time saving is lost (with the next big hit or time saving) Without distinguishing whether it is a case of executing 800 times of fluctuation display, fluctuation pattern tables F, G (Fig. 8-8 (F), (G) ) is selected, and the variable display of 5 seconds or 12 seconds is executed at a high rate to execute the countdown production and effect production, and after being controlled to the time saving state as a relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern table E (Fig. 8-8 (E)) is selected to execute a high-speed fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds, but it is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in the modification 2 of FIG. 8-47, when the relief time is shortened by performing 800 times of variation display after the RAM clearing process, the relief time is shortened from 10 variations to 1 variation before Also select the variation pattern table B (see FIG. 8-7 (B)) to perform the same variation display as usual, and after being controlled to the time saving state based on the relief time saving, the variation pattern table C (FIG. 8-7 (C)) may be selected to select a variation pattern similar to the time-saving state at the time of passing the big hit, and to perform the variation display of 5 seconds at a high rate.

Further, for example, as shown in the modification 3 of FIG. 8-47, when the 800th variation display is performed after the big hit and the relief time is shortened, the variation is performed when the 800th variation display is performed. From the pattern table I (see FIG. 8-8 (I)), a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) for relief short-time variation failure is selected, and variation display is performed with a variation time of 25 seconds. It should be noted that the characteristic portion 108IW described above is configured to execute the time-saving entry effect during the variable display, and to execute the mode transition effect and the right-handed notification during the pattern fixing period, but for example, during the variable display for 25 seconds (In this case, therefore, 0.5 seconds may be ensured for the pattern fixing period as usual).

In addition, in the modification 2 and modification 3 of FIG. 8-47, if the relief time is shortened after the RAM clearing process and if the relief time is shortened after the big hit, the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display that will be the relief time is different. In addition, it is possible to make the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display after shifting to the time saving state through the relief time saving state different, thereby making the performance different.

Also, for example, as shown in the modification 4 of FIG. 8-47, the variation pattern table B (see FIG. 8-7 (B)) is selected even before 10 variations before the relief time is shortened. Execute the same fluctuation display as usual, select the fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 8-7 (C)) during the time saving state based on the first relief time saving, and select the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving state when going through the big hit is selected to perform a 5-second variable display at a high rate, and in the time-saving state based on the second relief time-saving, select the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 8-8 (E)) and 1.5 seconds high speed It may be configured to perform a variable display of variations.

Next, a game machine according to Example 2 of the characterizing portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-48 to 8-54. In addition, about Example 2, a part different from Example 1 is mainly demonstrated.

In Example 2, in principle, it is not suggested that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction or the relief time reduction is near. Therefore, in the second embodiment, like the variation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 8-8 (F) of the first embodiment and the variation pattern table G as shown in FIG. There is no variation pattern table for That is, if the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 8-8 (F) and (G) only immediately before the relief time reduction, the tendency of the variation pattern will make the player notice that it is immediately before the relief time reduction. However, by not using such a variation pattern table, it is possible to prevent it from being noticed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the variable display that reduces the relief time is not a dedicated variation pattern for the reduced relief time, but a variation pattern that is also used for the variable display that does not reduce the relief time (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, such as the variation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 8-8 (I) of the first embodiment and the variation pattern table J as shown in FIG. There is no variation pattern table for variation when it becomes. With such a configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be made common between when the repair time is shortened and before the repair time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment)
Next, the variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 8-48 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the big hit variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 8-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if you lose), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern table for deviation during the probability variation state shown in FIG. 8-8 (H) Select H (step 100IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter. is 0 (that is, if there is no reserved storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) is selected.

If the variable probability flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating the time saving state controlled via the big hit is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via a big hit), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the variation pattern, and via the big hit shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) Select the fluctuation pattern table C for deviation during the controlled time saving state (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no reserved storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating the time saving state controlled via the time saving failure is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via time saving off), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the time saving off shown in FIG. 8-7 (D) Select the fluctuation pattern table D for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and determines the value of the total pending storage number counter. is 0 (that is, if there is no reserved storage), then the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving shown in FIG. 8-8 (E) as a table for determining the variation pattern. Select the fluctuation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the variation pattern for the deviation during the normal state shown in FIG. 8-7 (B) Select table B (step 100IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, S1715 and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. 8-7 and 8-8 to be used (step 100IWS1716).

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the variation time timer to measure the variation time. (step 100IWS1718), and start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer Waiting Demonstration Effect Control Process in Second Embodiment)
As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, it is not suggested that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is close. Therefore, a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is provided is performed based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command (see FIG. 8-26), but the relief depends on whether or not this telop display is executed and the presentation mode. There is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the time saving or the relief time saving is near. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer-waiting demonstration designation command, a telop display explaining the relief time reduction is always performed in a common manner.

In addition, even in the second embodiment, it may be possible to suggest that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is short or that the relief time is near, depending on whether or not the telop display is executed or the mode of presentation. However, in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the number of remaining fluctuations is 10 times or less), the execution of the telop display is restricted than in the period before that (for example, the execution ratio decreases, or not). By configuring in this way, the change of the background image when it becomes a relief time reduction (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is surprised You can give it and improve your interest.

(Variable display start setting process in the second embodiment)
Next, variable display start setting processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-49 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As the advance notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and a effect image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed when the count number becomes "0", and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is performed. may be set to execute.

FIG. 8-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the announcement effect execution determination table and the announcement effect mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, regardless of the remaining number of times until relief time reduction, the presence or absence of the execution of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 8-50(A). Further, when it is decided to execute the notice effect, the effect mode of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 8-50(B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-50 (A) and (B), in any case of the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, the presence or absence of the execution of the notice effect and the effect mode in the case of execution, configured to be determined by a common proportion. In addition, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when it becomes a relief time reduction and shifts to the time reduction state C, in the image display device 5, the background image corresponding to the time reduction state C (relief time reduction via time reduction state) (In this example, the background image is displayed in orange) (see step 078IWS638). With such a configuration, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved. can.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near, so the stimulation production according to the remaining variation number until the relief time is shortened, The processing for executing the countdown effect and the effect effect, and the processing for displaying the initial number corresponding to the number of times until the relief time is shortened are omitted.

In addition, in the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to execute a stimulating effect, a countdown effect, or an effect effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time is shortened. However, in a predetermined period (for example, a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations is 10 times or less) before the relief time is shortened, the execution of the fanning production, the countdown production, and the effect production is restricted (for example, , lower execution rate, or no execution). By configuring in this way, the change of the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is given unexpectedness and the interest is improved. be able to.

In addition, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variation display that reduces the relief time is not the dedicated variation pattern for the relief time reduction, but the variation pattern that is also used for the variation display that does not reduce the relief time (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) is used. Therefore, in Example 2, the processing for executing the time-saving rush effect and the time-saving rush appearance effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the variation display of the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is performed, the change in the background image (that is, notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly performed Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve his or her interest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in the second embodiment)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-51 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 8-51, in the variable display (the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1) immediately before the variable display that becomes relief time reduction, the special symbol variation time ( For example, when 12 seconds have elapsed, the game ends, and when the lost pattern (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the lost pattern (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Then, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is performed (see steps 100IWS74 and S75). After the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has passed, it ends, and when the missing pattern (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the missing pattern (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed over the design confirmation period of 0.5 seconds. (See step 100 IWS 1137). Then, when the pattern confirmation period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 8-51, in the image display device 5, the background image (this example Then, the background image is switched to an orange display color (see step 100 IWS 638). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and prevent the production from becoming complicated. In addition, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the change in the game state, and to improve the amusement when the relief time is shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-51, in the period in which the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after shifting to the time saving state C, the right-handed notification is performed (FIG. 8-52 (C1 )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a game state in which the player hits to the right while suppressing the complexity of the performance relating to the transition to the time saving state C, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. can be suppressed.

(Example of production in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until transition to the time saving state C which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the shift to the time saving state. In addition, in FIG. 8-52, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (A), when the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed after the variable display to be a relief time reduction is started, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (B) 2, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed in combination with the missing patterns.

Then, when the symbol determination period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (C1), in the image display device 5, the time saving state C The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed.

It should be noted that, when the reserved storage is not stored when the pattern fixing period has passed, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (C2), the image display device 5 In, while switching to the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) according to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving), the right hitting notification may be performed.

Also, at the timings shown in FIGS. 8-52 (C1) and (C2), explanations on the relief time reduction by the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. ) may be performed. In addition, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction and the effect suggesting that the relief time reduction is near are not executed, but at an arbitrary timing, the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 8-37 (A) and (B) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration as shown in FIG. 8-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is given unexpectedness and interest. can be improved.

In addition, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the change in the game state, and to improve the interest when the relief time reduction is established. In addition, the variation pattern can be made common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

It should be noted that the presentation mode until transition to the time saving state C which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-52. For example, Modification 1 shown in FIG. 8-53 or Modification 2 shown in FIG. 8-53 may be used.

(Production example [Modification 1] in Embodiment 2)
FIG. 8-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until transition to the relief time reduction in the modification 1 of the embodiment 2. FIG.

In the modification 1 shown in FIG. 8-53, as shown in FIG. 8-53 (A), after the variable display immediately before the variable display for the relief time reduction is stopped, the variable display for the relief time reduction is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-53 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) is executed to make the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 difficult to see. be done.

Then, when the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has passed, the blackout state is eliminated as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

Then, when the symbol determination period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 8-53 (D), in the image display device 5, the time saving state C The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 8-53 (C) when the blackout state is eliminated, the image display and the output of the effect sound that notify that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started are performed. good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest. 8-53, for example, in the variable display start setting process, by selecting a process table including a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) when it is a variable display that saves time. can be realized.

(Production example [Modification 2] in Embodiment 2)
FIG. 8-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until transition to the relief time reduction in the modification 2 of the embodiment 2. FIG.

In the modification 2 shown in FIG. 8-54, as shown in FIG. 8-54 (A), the variable display that becomes a relief time reduction is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variation time ( For example, when 8 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 8-54(B), the decorative symbols 100IW100 are temporarily stopped and displayed in combination with the missing symbols on the image display device 5. FIG. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 8-54 (B), since the special figure fluctuation time has not passed, the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed in fluctuation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-54 (C), in the image display device 5, a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes the previously displayed effect display (for example, decorative symbols 100IW100, etc.) difficult to see. executed. In addition, the special figure variation time elapses while the time saving rush performance (blackout performance) is being executed, and the small symbols 100IW101 are derived and displayed in combination with the missing symbols. The time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) is continuously executed during the symbol fixing period.

Then, when the symbol determination period has passed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. It is switched to the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) according to the time saving state via the relief time saving). In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-54(D), the notification of hitting to the right is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest. 8-53, for example, in the variable display start setting process, by selecting a process table including a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) when it is a variable display that saves time. can be realized.

In addition, at the timings of FIGS. 8-53 (C), (D), FIGS. 8-54 (C), (D), etc., relief by telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 8-37 (A), (B) You may be made to perform the explanation (for example, explanation of the production|presentation in relief time reduction function or relief time reduction) regarding time saving. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 108IW shown above, in the period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the number of remaining variations until the relief variation is 10 or less), the variation pattern to be super reach is determined. , While it is configured to be restricted to decide to execute the notice effect, in the second embodiment, neither is configured to be restricted, but by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and a notice of a type whose expectation is not very high among the notice effects The production may be made executable. In other words, it may be possible to limit the determination of the variation pattern for super reach, and to limit the execution of a type of advance notice effect with a high degree of expectation among the advance notice effects.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the effect (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect) that suggests that the relief time is near, such as a stimulating effect, a countdown effect, Effect production is executed, the initial output according to the number of times until the relief time reduction and the telop display during customer waiting (for example, the telop display 108IW101 shown in FIG. 8-26) are displayed. I can't limit it. For example, at an arbitrary timing during the variable display or during the stoppage of the variable display, a motion effect to operate the movable body 32, a light emission effect to make the light emitting body such as a decorative LED emit light in a specific mode (for example, to emit rainbow light), the movable body 32 Depending on the execution frequency and execution mode of vibration effects such as vibrating the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, etc., it may be suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction or the relief time reduction is near.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the effect control command transmitted when the power is turned on (for example, the effect control command to instruct restoration from power failure, the effect control command to instruct initialization) , If the performance control board 12 side cannot receive normally (for example, if the command is lost or the command is garbled), based on the command specifying the game state, the command specifying the variation pattern, etc. Although the production of can be executed, it may not be possible to execute the relief suggestion production that suggests the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near. be possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous remedy suggestive effect.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, a relief time reduction number 1 designation command and a relief time reduction number 2 designation command that specify the number of times of variation until relief time reduction (in this example, sent each time a variable display is performed ) can not be received normally, the remedy suggesting effect may not be executed. In this case, the relief suggesting performance may not be executed only during the variable display in which the command for specifying the number of times of relief time 1 or the command for the number of times of relief time 2 is not normally received, or the relief suggestion performance may not be executed until the next big hit occurs. You may make it not perform suggestion production. Also, for example, if it is not possible to receive normally, the relief suggestion performance is executed in a production mode or execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that will be a relief time reduction is large (that is, it is not close to a relief time reduction). may With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous remedy suggestive effect.

Moreover, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example shown above show the case of application to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on the variation display result, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a game machine configured to be able to execute a role game that controls a big win game based on the fact that a game ball wins a prize (V win) in a specific area (V prize area) in the accessory during a small win game, You may apply the structure controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving shown by characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above.

Further, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example described above, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, switch the value to be set in the relief time reduction counter to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear process is executed or the jackpot occurs, or randomly change the value to be set in the relief time reduction counter You may switch to "800" or "900."

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above showed the case where the time saving flag C was set each time the relief time saving occurred, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numerical value) set in the second relief time saving that has moved again may differ from the time saving flag (third value) set in the first relief time saving.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where different productions (variation patterns) are made in the time saving state after the big hit and the relief time saving state are shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the same effect (fluctuation pattern) may be provided in the time saving state after the big hit and in the relief time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification is made just before the end of the time saving state after the big hit and just before the start of the relief time saving (notification of Figure 8-39 (K), notification suggesting future big hit acquisition, etc.) good.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where different productions (variation patterns) are made in the time saving state and the relief time saving state are shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is good also as the same production (variation pattern) in the time saving state out of time saving and relief time saving. Specifically, even if the same notification (notification of Figure 8-39 (K), notification of future jackpot acquisition, etc.) is performed just before the end of the time saving state and just before the start of the relief time saving good.

As described above, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 1A) to (means 8A) shown below.

(Means 1A) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is updated by the update means. Numerical information can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, game control Part for executing steps 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the microcomputer 100, step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the second identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 part to be executed), predetermined suggestive effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 108IWS811 execution part) and a special notification effect for notifying that the special state control is started based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-52 (C1) and (C2) background image changes, blackout at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 8-53 (B), blackout at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 8-54 (C), etc.) Effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, effect control CPU 120 executes step 100 IWS 638), and the predetermined suggestive effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestive effect in the period before the special condition is established (for example, shown in FIG. 8-44 Thus, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. (see Figure 8-50). According to such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide the player with a sense of surprise, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display that satisfies the special condition is started. This is a mode in which the effect display displayed before the start is made difficult to see (for example, it is blacked out at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 8-53(B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, an effect variable display executing means capable of executing variable display of the effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. In addition, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display that satisfies the special condition ends. , blacked out at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 8-54(C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display that satisfies the special condition is being executed. It is an aspect of changing the background display in the means to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is performed. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) Any one of means 1A to 4A includes explanation effect execution means capable of executing an explanation effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, FIGS. 8-52 (C1), (C2 ), at the timings shown in FIGS. 8-53(D) and 8-54(D), explanations are given using telop displays 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 8-37(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to 5A, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variable pattern shown in FIG. 8-48). part for executing setting processing), and the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-1 (normal variation )), and the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect after the non-specific display result (for example, the missing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display that satisfies the special condition. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is being controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state. It is possible to improve the interest when is established.

(Means 7A) In any of means 1A to 6A, variable display execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 step part for executing S112), and pending storage means (for example, a first pending storage number buffer and a second pending storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the starting condition is met but the start condition is not met. a buffer), backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the updating means and pending information stored by the pending storage means even when the power supply is stopped, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, Initialization means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) that can execute initialization processing to initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means, and when power supply is started, backup storage Restoration means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6 part) and According to such a configuration, while optimizing the control by the initialization process, power failure occurs in a situation where the pending memory corresponding to the special number of times of variable display is stored before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game is played.

(Means 8A) In any of means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the state of time saving flags A to C) that can be specified to be controlled in a special state; Execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (for example, the value of a time-saving counter) that can specify the number of times the variable display is executed in the state, and special state information and execution count information even if power supply is stopped Backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information and initialization means (for example, game control and a portion where the microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means holds the special status information, the number of times of execution information, and the numerical information by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , in the initialization process, while initializing the special state information and the execution count information, the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the state of the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving counter are initialized On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power failure is set)). According to such a configuration, intentional initialization of the numerical information can be prevented, and the degree of relief for the player can be enhanced.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1B) to (means 5B).

(Means 1B) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. Numerical information can be updated by updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern and a variable than the predetermined variable display pattern Variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern with a long display period (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) Pattern determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, a part for executing the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-14), and the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means is variably displayed When the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS74, the part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable The display pattern determination means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result (for example, FIG. 8-7 ( As shown in A) and (B) , the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) can be determined for both the case of a big hit and the case of a loss), and the display result of the variable display is When the specific display result is obtained, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) The variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) has a higher ratio of being determined in the case of a big hit than the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), and the predetermined period before the special condition is established When the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-8 (F) and (G)). In addition, just before the relief time is reduced, the rate of determining the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

(Means 2B) In the means 1B, the suggesting effect executing means is provided which can execute a suggesting effect related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, countdown effect, effect effect, telop display while waiting for customers), and the suggesting effect executing means In the predetermined period before the special condition is established, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect is higher than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-31, the effect control CPU 120 ∼ S809, and the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, the player can expect the establishment of the special condition, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or 2B, an explanation effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in Figs. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-31, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any one of means 1B to 3B, execution of notice effect capable of executing notice effect (for example, timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while variable display is being executed. means, wherein the advance notice effect execution means can execute the notice effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display can be executed. When the specific display result is obtained, the proportion of executing the notice effect is higher than when the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) period) is lower than the period before the predetermined period, the proportion of executing the advance notice effect when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-31 , the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A (see FIGS. 8-32 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the advance notice effect is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

(Means 5B) In any one of means 1B to 4B, execution of notice effect capable of executing notice effect (for example, timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while variable display is being executed. means, the advance notice effect executing means performs a specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") and a predetermined the advance notice effect can be executed depending on the mode (for example, the effect mode "blue"), and when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the proportion of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, If the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) than the period before the predetermined period (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-31, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See FIGS. 8-32 (C) and (D)) . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the advance notice effect is executed in the specific mode during the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

In addition, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 8C).

(Means 1C) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. Numerical information can be updated by updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a special variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1 ( A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 8-14). and the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17 ), and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is performed or the variable display of the second identification information (for example, in FIG. 8-13 As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the variable display pattern determining means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and can determine the special variable display pattern before the special condition is satisfied. In, without determining the special variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-14, step 108IWS1701A, S1701B in the game control microcomputer 100), by the special variable display pattern specific notification effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-31, a game control microcomputer The portion of 100 that performs step 108 IWS 806B. (See FIGS. 8-38 (G) and (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled to the special state by the establishment of the special condition, and to improve the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means executes a specific notification effect when a variable display satisfying a special condition is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When a variable display satisfying a special condition is executed, and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is executed after executing a production in a manner common to the specific notification production. Special notification effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 8- 41 (G'), see (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the special condition has been established, it is notified that the control is in an advantageous state. can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or 2C, when a variable display that satisfies a special condition is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is not executed before the special condition is established. A predetermined notification effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, a full rotation effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed according to a mode is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and improve the interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or 2C, when the variable display that satisfies the special condition is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the mode is the same as before the special condition is met. Notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect that notifies that the specific display result is derived and displayed by pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and variation pattern PB2-3 (super reach β)). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is established and before the special condition is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any one of means 1C to 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. Display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) longer than (for example, as shown in Figure 8-15, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135. See Figure 8-36), the special condition is established In the display period of the display result of the variable display when the As shown, the effect control CPU 120 has a portion for executing step 100IWS847). According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure the period for executing the notification effect in the normal state, clarify the effect when switching the game state, and improve the interest.

(Means 6C) In any one of means 1C to 5C, at the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period , and after outputting the specific signal, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, 4 jackpot signals) corresponding to the control of the special state (see, for example, FIG. 8-18). According to such a configuration, when the specific signal and the special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means performs special processing (for example, the next fluctuation postponement processing shown in FIG. ), output a special signal. According to such a configuration, when the specific signal and the special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside.

(Means 8C) In any one of means 1C to 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first starting prize opening) provided at a position through which a game medium passing through a specific path (for example, a left-handed path) can pass ), a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special path (for example, a right-handed path) can pass, and a variable display of identification information, the second Variable display execution means (for example, game control (the part where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game medium should be shot toward the special path (for example, in a game state where the player is assumed to hit right a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the game medium The second start condition is established when the game medium passes through the second passage area, and the special output means provides a display result of the variable display when the special condition is established. A special output can be executed at the start of a special process (for example, the next fluctuation postponement process shown in FIG. 8-45) that is executed after the display period of . According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output capable of specifying that the game media should be shot toward the special path at an appropriate timing.

In addition, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 5D).

(Means 1D) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. updating means that can update the numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a variable display pattern that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns Display pattern determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-48), and the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means is variable When a special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the execution number of displays, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 A portion that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, a portion that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the special condition is established, the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is established (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and the special condition is established. After the non-specific display result (e.g., lost pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a special notification effect (e.g., a background image corresponding to the relief time reduction ( Orange) display) can be executed special notification effect Execution means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the change in the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is established. In addition, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is established and before the special condition is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) a reserve storage means (for example, a first reserve memory number buffer or a second reserve memory number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as reserve information when the starting condition is met but the start condition is not met; a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a pending change effect) whose notice target is a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means, wherein the pre-reading notice execution means is Of the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is established, the variable display when the special condition is established can be executed as an announcement target, while the variable that the special condition is established can be executed. Execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect for the variable display after the display is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the presentation contents.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed. is a mode of changing the background display on the display means to a background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 8-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve interest, and prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to 3D, there is provided suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect related to establishment of a special condition (for example, countdown effect, effect effect, telop display during customer waiting, etc.). The suggestive effect executing means restricts the execution of the suggestive effect for a predetermined period before the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve interest.

(Means 5D) In any of means 1D to 4D, explanation effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 8-52 (C1), (C2), At the timings shown in FIGS. 8-53(D) and 8-54(D), a telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 8-37(A) and (B) is provided). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine shown in (means 1E) to (means 4E) shown below is disclosed in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1E-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 , a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) and variable display are executed Updating means capable of updating numerical information based on (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-13), a predetermined variable display pattern and from the predetermined variable display pattern Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including shortened variable display patterns (for example, variation patterns PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation)) whose variable display periods are shortened (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 is provided with a part that executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is , It is possible to control to a special state when the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the game control microcomputer Step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75 in 100, step 100IWS170, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 ), allowed The variable display pattern determination means makes the display result of the variable display a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is established, rather than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. In the case, the rate of determining the shortened variable display pattern is high (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. Figure 8-7 (C), Figure 8-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of variable display reaches a specific number, the rate of execution of variable display by the shortened variable display pattern increases, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled. is shortened, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 1E-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 , a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) and variable display are executed Numerical information can be updated based on update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of reach production (For example, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) (for example, for game control A portion where the microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. When the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS74, the part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable The display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. Figure 8-7 (C), Figure 8-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specific number of times, the ratio of the display result of the variable display according to the specific variable display pattern to the non-specific display result is low, thereby reducing interest. can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In means 1E, background display means capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, step 100IWS634, S638 in the effect control CPU120 portion) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the difference in the game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or 2E, variable display execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112 and a pending memory means (for example, a first pending memory number buffer or a second pending memory number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the starting condition is met but the start condition is not met. and a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) whose notice target is a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, and a pre-reading notice execution means. The means is a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when the special condition is established, and the ratio of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and any of a plurality of types of pre-reading notice The ratio of whether to execute the production is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703. See FIGS. 8-28 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and execution type of the foreseeing advance notice effect are determined in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established. It can be different, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 4E) In any of means 1E to 3E, variable display executing means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 step part for executing S112), and a pending storage means (for example, a first pending storage number buffer or a second pending storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not met. buffer), and a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) whose notice target is variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, The pre-reading notice execution means is capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the variable display when the special condition is established among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is established, Execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect for the variable display after the variable display where the special condition is established is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the contents of the presentation.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1a) to (means 10a).

(Means 1a) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is updated by the update means. Numerical information can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, step 100IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. And when the variable display of the second identification information is executed to update the numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the update of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for playing the game can be enhanced. can be done.

In this example, the initial value is set to the relief time-saving number counter when a big hit occurs, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots with no time reduction, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with second special symbols, etc.) are provided, and for some jackpots, the initial value of the relief time reduction counter is not set. It may be configured as

In addition, in this example, although the case where the 1st special design mainly fluctuates is shown in a normal state, it is not restricted to such a mode. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased to vary both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition is established on the basis that a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) different from the specific display result as the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed a special number of times in succession ( For example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the game control microcomputer Step 100IWS172 and Step 100IWS173 in 100). According to such a configuration, since display results disadvantageous to the player are relieved when they are successively derived and displayed, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

(Means 3a) In means 1a or 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, variable probability state, time saving state) (for example, FIG. 8 As shown in -17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to a special state once, it can be controlled to a special state again. Therefore, it is possible to control to a special state until it is controlled to a substantially advantageous state. Thus, the player's investment can be suppressed, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

It should be noted that, in this example, low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability variable state), low probability high base (time saving state) shows the case of updating the relief time reduction number counter, such It is not limited to modes. For example, low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability variable state), low probability high base (time saving state), high probability low base (latency probability change) update the number of relief time counters in all four states. It may be configured as In this case, it can also be applied to a game machine that executes a drop lottery to the normal state in the variable probability state.

In addition, in this example, the case of preferentially digesting the second special symbol is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the first start winning hole, a high probability low base (small hit RUSH) is provided for frequent small hits, the game balls are digested in order of winning, the first special symbol and the second special It may be configured such that the symbols are changed simultaneously.

In addition, in this example, although the case where the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are provided is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to provide only the first special symbol.

(Means 4a) In any one of means 1a to 3a, the update means sets numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16, the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that executes step 100IWS135, a portion that executes step 100IWS144, and a portion that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17). According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous to the player, and there is no need to rescue the player.

(Means 5a) In means 4a, the predetermined condition is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100) may have been According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous to the player, and there is no need to rescue the player.

(Means 6a) In means 4a, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving) is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, FIG. 8 -17, the part that executes step 100 IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the game (the part that executes step 100 IWS 167 in the control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 7a) In means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. may be configured to According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief for the player can be enhanced.

(Means 8a) In means 4a, backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped when the power supply is stopped, and the updating means , When a specific condition is established (for example, execution of initialization processing), the numerical information held by the backup storage means is set to the initial value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-11, the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game hall, it may be too disadvantageous for the game hall. can be made easier.

(Means 9a) In any one of means 1a to 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the state The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period of a special number of times or more based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, part that executes step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. It is possible to control the special state of a specific period again (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the game The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes different effects in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIG. 8-47 The part shown in Example 4) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is a situation in which the advantageous state is not controlled for a long period of time. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by adding a change to the effect mode.

(Means 10a) In any one of means 1a to 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the state The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period of a special number of times or more based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, part that executes step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. It is possible to control the special state of a specific period again (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the game The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes a common effect in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, FIG. 8-47 It may be configured as shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the state is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily conscious of the fact that the situation is not under control, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1b-1), (means 1b-2) to (means 5b).

(Means 1b-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state (eg, a gaming machine controllable to a jackpot game state), in which a game area in which game media can be divided into a first path (for example, a left-handed path) and a second path (for example, a right-handed path); Controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 are Part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game necessary for executing multiple types of processing including control of variable display and control of advantageous state A process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) for updating the data value indicating the progress state and executing the process corresponding to the data value. In addition, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13 2, a portion that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. Numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the game control microcomputer 100 The part that executes step 100 IWS71 in), the processing execution means executes the first processing related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 part that executes S110 to S113), the data value is different from the first numerical value When the second numerical value, the second processing related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the data value is the first numerical value and the first numerical value. When the third numerical value is different from the two numerical values, the state control means executes the third processing for controlling the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43, the game control microcomputer 100), the game is played by shooting the game medium along the first path in the normal state, the game is played by shooting the game medium along the second path in the special state, and the game is played in the third path. It is characterized by comprising a launch promotion notification means (see FIG. 8-46) for executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during execution of the process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1b-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 , a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) and variable display are executed Update means that can update numerical information based on (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control and advantageous state control A data value indicating a game progress state required for executing a plurality of types of processing including processing execution means for executing processing corresponding to the data value (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, game control and a part for executing step S25 in the microcomputer 100), and the state control means enters the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. Controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS 172 and step 100IWS 173), the updating means updates the numerical information between when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100), the processing execution means executes the first processing related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, 5, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and executes the second processing related to the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (for example, FIG. 5, in the game control microcomputer 100 (steps S114 to S117 in Steps S114 to S117), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means performs a third process for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition. Execute (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), and execute a notification effect to notify that it is controlled to a special state during the execution of the third process It is characterized in that it has an effect execution means (see FIG. 8-46) to perform. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

In addition, in this example, the case of giving priority to the processing related to the big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, priority may be given to processing related to variable display or processing related to saving time.

In this example, a case is shown in which the right stroke is notified in the next fluctuation postponing process, which is the third process, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that only the mode transition effect suggesting transition to the time-saving state is executed without performing the right-handed notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the process execution means executes the second process after the first process when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display satisfying the special condition ( For example, as shown in FIG. 8-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed and step 100IWS114 is not executed. According to such a configuration, priority is given to the control of the advantageous state, so that the player is not disadvantaged, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In the means 1b-1, 1b-2 or 2b, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the game control In the step 100 of the microcomputer 100 that executes IWS71), the process executing means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, FIG. 8 -17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), and changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, 8-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100), special information performs different processing when it is the first information and when it is the second information (for example, FIG. As shown in 8-14, it may be configured to execute step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, by managing the special information, it is possible to suitably execute the process of transitioning to the special state.

(Means 4b) In the means 3b, variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided. The display pattern determining means determines different variable display patterns depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-14, step 100 IWS 1714 (the part that executes According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the effect when the variable display is executed the special number of times.

(Means 5b) In the means 3b, variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided. The display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern in which the determination time of the display result is different between when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 100IWS1128 and 100IWS1130 in the microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the effect when the variable display is executed the special number of times.

In addition, the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 1c) to (means 6c) shown below is disclosed in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1c) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), a game control means capable of controlling a game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120), and a variable display (For example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 8-31, Step 108 IWS 811 in the production control CPU 120 , and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 2, a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) and variable display are executed Update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the state controlled by the state control means and a state information control means for controlling identifiable state information, wherein the state control means is controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and then to the special state. Controllable (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-12), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-17 2, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the update means, when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed to update numerical information (e.g. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the state information control means sets the state information to the first numerical value in the normal state (for example, FIG. 8- 16, step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100, step 100IWS149 is not set, that is, neither the time saving flag A nor C is set, the data corresponding to each is "0"), the variable display When the state information is controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result, the state information is set to the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the game The part that executes step 100IWS537 in the control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is "1"). When the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. is set, the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means, and the state information is the second numerical value when it is in a special state It is possible to transmit specific information according to the case and the third numerical value (for example, the part shown in FIG. 8-10, as shown in FIG. 8-19, Step 100IWS540 in the game control microcomputer 100 8-17, the part that executes step 100IWS174 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, control is facilitated, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

In addition, although the case where the time saving state A designation|designated command and the time saving state C designation|designated command were transmitted was shown in this example as specific information, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the background designation command and the variation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a manner that can identify the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. good too. In addition, for example, when a big win is achieved, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) and a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) are transmitted in different modes according to the game state, and depending on which command is received. The fanfare period and the ending period may be changed.

(Means 2c) In means 1c, the state information control means changes the state information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the It may be configured to use a fourth numerical value different from the three numerical values (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, control is facilitated, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 3c) In means 1c or 2c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, and when the state control means satisfies the special condition. It may be configured such that it is possible to execute a different effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 100IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, since the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, it is possible to execute the performance according to the situation, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any one of means 1c to 3c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, and when the state control means When the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the condition, a common effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS634 and 100IWS638). may be configured to According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition the same every time, and thereby prevent an increase in development costs because a new performance is not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 5c) In any one of means 1c to 4c, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving) is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means, the state control means, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed When the special state is controlled and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, different effects can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform steps 100IWS 636, (the part that executes S638). According to such a configuration, since the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, it is possible to execute the performance according to the situation, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any one of means 1c to 4c, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means Common when the state control means controls to the special state based on the derivation display of the special display result and when the state control means controls to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition It may be configured to be able to execute effects (for example, effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS636 and 100IWS638). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition the same every time, and thereby prevent an increase in development costs because a new performance is not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in (means 1d) to (means 4d) shown below.

(Means 1d) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), a game control means capable of controlling a game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120), and a variable display (For example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 8-31, Step 108 IWS 811 in the production control CPU 120 , and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 2, a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) and variable display are executed Update means that can update the numerical information based on that (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the power supply is stopped, backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of executions of the variable display; It is possible to control to a special state when the condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 8-17 , the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100). Numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means controls predetermined information when power supply is started. can send to means (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means, based on the reception of the predetermined information, the power supply was started It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a suggestive effect regarding the number of executions of variable display in a later predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-22, a portion for executing step 100IWS630 in the effect control CPU 120). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, the player is motivated to play a game from the opening of the game arcade, and the operating rate of the game machine can be increased.

In this example, the initial result is shown as a suggestive effect regarding the number of executions of the variable display, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute a suggestive effect by changing the background, effect during fluctuation up to 100 rotations, and display on a demo screen or menu screen.

It should be noted that when a command (S9 in FIG. 8-12) specifying initialization is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until relief time reduction as an initial value and execute the effect. .

(Means 2d) In means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can specify numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when power supply is started (for example, As shown in 8-11, it may be configured as a portion for executing step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, the player will be motivated to play a game from the opening of the game arcade, thereby increasing the operation rate of the game machine and suppressing an increase in the processing load.

In addition, although the case where the command which can specify the value of a relief time reduction counter is shown at the time of restoration is shown in this example, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, 1 to 99 rotations can be specified in units of 100 rotations, 100 to 199 rotations can be specified, . . . 500 to 599 rotations can be specified. Although the value of the time saving number counter is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but 127 or less may be configured to transmit an identifiable command.

(Means 3d) In means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in relation to the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-14, The part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means can execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition based on the specific information ( For example, as shown in FIG. 8-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the effect control CPU 120), as the specific information, it is possible to specify that the difference between the number of times of variable display execution and the special number of times is less than or equal to a predetermined value. Second specific information that can be specified that the difference between the first specific information (for example, a relief time reduction number 1 designation command as shown in FIG. 8-9) and the number of executions of variable display and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value and (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-9, the number of times of relief time reduction 2 designation command) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by regularly suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of inadvertently inflicting a loss on the player and to suitably implement the processing relating to the specific information.

In this example, the difference between the number of execution times of the variable display and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value shows the case of transmitting the relief time reduction number of times 2 designation command is the second specific information, such a mode not limited to For example, when the difference between the number of execution times of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value, it may be configured not to transmit the relief time reduction number of times 2 designation command, which is the second specific information.

(Means 4d) In any one of means 1d to 3d, the effect control means is controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display for a first predetermined number of times less than the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120, FIG. 8-39 (I) to FIG. 8-40 (M )), and every time the variable display is performed a second predetermined number of times, which is less than the first predetermined number of times, before the special number of variable displays are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-31). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the effect control CPU 120 may be configured as shown in FIGS. 8-37(A) to 8-38(F)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by regularly suggesting features to a player, the risk of unknowingly losing money can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, although the case where production|presentation is performed based on the count value of a relief time reduction counter is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the relief time reduction counter.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2) shown below.

(Means 1e-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), Effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 8-31, the effect control CPU 120 A part that executes step 108IWS811), and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, in FIG. 8-17 As shown, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the power supply is stopped backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of executions of variable display; (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-14, a portion that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is an update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is established by the numerical information updated becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 A portion that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, a portion that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. when and The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect control means , when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized; After the contents are initialized and then the specific display result is derived and displayed, different performances are executed when controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition. (For example, the portions shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3 of FIG. 8-47). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing of setting values are increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), Effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 8-31, the effect control CPU 120 A part that executes step 108IWS811), and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, in FIG. 8-17 As shown, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the power supply is stopped backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of executions of variable display; (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-14, a portion that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is an update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is established by the numerical information updated becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 A portion that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, a portion that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. when and The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect control means , when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized; When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the content is initialized and then controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition, different effects are executed after being controlled to the special state ( For example, the parts shown in modified examples 2 and 3 of FIG. 8-47). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing of setting values are increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although this example shows a case where only the variation pattern table B is used after clearing the RAM, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to use a plurality of variation pattern tables as in the case after the big hit.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation and display of a specific display result, State control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, and update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display, wherein the state control means is a variable display. can be controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the above, and the numerical information updated by the updating means is the special number of times as the number of times variable display is executed. When the special condition is satisfied by the corresponding specific value, the update means can be controlled to the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Numerical information is updated in each case, and there are a plurality of types of advantageous states, including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled is different, and the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state , the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1f, for example, the special advantageous state is a definite variable jackpot, the specific advantageous state is a normal jackpot, and the time saving state after the definite variable time reduction is a normal jackpot , and the relief time saving state is made higher than the time saving state after the normal jackpot.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the control is made to the advantageous state. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of special advantage is different, and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information The number of executions of variable display for satisfying the special condition is the special number of times in common between when the control is performed and when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the first identification information while increasing interest by exhibiting different game characteristics when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling property by having the special number of times common to the case of display and the case of variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (time saving continues until the next big hit) is the first special symbol and the second special pattern, and 800 times, which is a condition to be controlled to reduce the relief time when controlled to a big hit based on the first special pattern and when controlled to a big hit based on the second special pattern. may be configured so that the number of fluctuations of is common.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or 2f, the disadvantageous setting value is the first probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and the advantageous setting is the second probability that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means for setting one of a plurality of set values including a value and a set value is provided, and a special condition set to a disadvantageous set value is more difficult than a set value set to an advantageous set value. The advantage of the special state that is easily established and controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the state advantage, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". And, if it is set to a disadvantageous setting (e.g. "1"), the number of fluctuations that is the condition for reducing the relief time is less than if it is set to an advantageous setting value (e.g. "6"). Then, the advantage in the saving working hours is set higher than the advantage in the saving working hours after the big hit. It should be noted that those who are set to disadvantageous settings (e.g. "1") have a higher relief time-saving arrival rate than those set to advantageous setting values (e.g. "6"), and relief time-saving is always time-saving Since the number of times is 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), the advantage may be higher than the time saving state via the big win (for example, the number of times of time saving is 100 times after the normal big win).

(Means 4f) In any one of means 1f to 3f, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the control is performed to an advantageous state. Which of the plurality of types of special conditions is controlled later is common regardless of which set value is set, and the advantage of the special condition controlled when the special condition is established. is common when any set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property due to the set value, and to realize a sound game property.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4f, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, after the big hit, which one of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled is made common when any set value is set, and the advantage in relief time-saving is set when any set value is set. can be configured to be common.

(Means 5f) In any one of means 1f to 4f, when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information , the ratio of which of the plurality of types is controlled to an advantageous state is different, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and corresponds to the variable display of the second identification information The advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common between when the special condition is established and when the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, it is controlled when the special condition is established while exhibiting different game characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the advantage of the special state is common to any set value, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5f, for example, when a big win occurs with the first special symbol and when a big win occurs with the second special symbol, The proportions controlled for the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot are made different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is shortened based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is shortened based on the second special symbol. may be configured so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6f) In any one of means 1f to 5f, the variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided for determining the variable display pattern determining means, and the variable display pattern determining means has a higher variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. is a non-specific display result, the shortened variable display pattern is likely to be selected. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of the means 6f is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 8-8(E), for example.

(Means 7f) In any one of means 1f to 6f, the variable display pattern is provided with variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of the ready-to-win effect. If the special state controlled when the special condition is established is more favorable than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result. The rate of deciding on a specific variable display pattern is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of means 7f is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 8-8(E), for example.

(Means 8f) In any one of means 1f to 7f, the updating means can update the specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display in the special state, and the state control means By setting the special information, the special state can be controlled, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated. a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. an initialization means capable of initializing the contents stored in the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the initialization means initializing the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information, and Do not initialize numeric information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player even when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 8f, for example, in the initialization process shown in FIG. The value of the relief time reduction number counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation and display of a specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a state; an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display; a variable display executing means capable of executing variable display based on the following; a holding storage means capable of storing information relating to the variable display as holding information when the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met; and power supply is stopped. backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and pending information when the power supply is started; recovery means capable of executing recovery control for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means based on the contents stored in the backup storage means and the hold information stored by the hold storage means when the state control means , the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display, so that when the special condition is established, the special state can be controlled, and after the restoration control is executed , when the special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored pending information, the updating means can control to the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the second identification information is displayed. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player while optimizing the control by the initialization.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of means 1g, for example, when executing the initialization process, the relief time saving counter and the pending memory are reset, while when the power is restored The relief time-saving counter and the pending memory are restored, and when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory at the time of restoration becomes the 800th variation and the condition for the relief time-saving control is established, the relief time-saving control is enabled. Just do it.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the control is made to the advantageous state. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of special advantage is different, and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information The number of executions of variable display for satisfying the special condition is the special number of times in common between when the control is performed and when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the first identification information while increasing interest by exhibiting different game characteristics when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling property by having the special number of times common to the case of display and the case of variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (time saving continues until the next big hit) is the first special symbol and the second special pattern, and the variation that becomes the condition for the relief time reduction control when the big win is controlled based on the first special pattern and when the big win is controlled based on the second special pattern. It may be configured so that the number of times is common.

(Means 3g) In means 1g or 2g, the disadvantageous setting value is the first probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and the advantageous setting is the second probability that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means for setting one of a plurality of set values including a value and a set value is provided, and a special condition set to a disadvantageous set value is more difficult than a set value set to an advantageous set value. The advantage of the special state that is easily established and controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the state advantage, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3g, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". And, if it is set to an unfavorable setting (eg "1"), it will reduce the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened than if it is set to an advantageous setting value (eg "6"). is higher than the advantage of the time-saving state after the big hit. It should be noted that the disadvantageous setting (e.g. "1") is more likely to be lost than the advantageous setting (e.g. "6"), so it is easier to save time. , Since the relief time reduction is always 800 times of time reduction (substantially until the next big hit), it is more advantageous than the time reduction state via the big win (for example, the number of time reduction is usually 100 times after the big win). good too.

(Means 4b) In any one of means 1g to 3g, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the control is performed to an advantageous state. Which of the plurality of types of special conditions is controlled later is common regardless of which set value is set, and the advantage of the special condition controlled when the special condition is established. is common when any set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property due to the set value, and to realize a sound game property.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4g, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, after the big hit, which one of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled is made common when any set value is set, and the advantage in relief time-saving is set when any set value is set. can be configured to be common.

(Means 5g) In any one of means 1g to 4g, when the variable display of the first identification information triggers control to an advantageous state, and when the variable display of the second identification information triggers control to an advantageous state , the ratio of which of the plurality of types is controlled to an advantageous state is different, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and corresponds to the variable display of the second identification information The advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common between when the special condition is established and when the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, it is controlled when the special condition is established while exhibiting different game characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the advantage of the special state is common to any set value, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g, for example, when a big win occurs due to the first special symbol and when a big win occurs due to the second special symbol, The proportions controlled for the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot are made different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is shortened based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is shortened based on the second special symbol. may be configured so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6g) In any one of means 1g to 5g, the variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided for determining the variable display pattern determining means, and the variable display pattern determining means has a higher variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. is a non-specific display result, the shortened variable display pattern is likely to be selected. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of the means 6g is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 8-8(E), for example.

(Means 7g) In any one of means 1g to 6g, the variable display pattern is provided with variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of the ready-to-win effect. If the special state controlled when the special condition is established is more favorable than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result. The rate of deciding on a specific variable display pattern is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of means 7g is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 8-8(E), for example.

(Means 8g) In any one of means 1g to 7g, the updating means can update the specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display in the special state, and the state control means By setting the special information, the special state can be controlled, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated. a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. an initialization means capable of initializing the contents stored in the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the initialization means initializing the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information, and Do not initialize numeric information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player even when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 8g, for example, in the initialization process shown in FIG. The value of the relief time reduction number counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, State control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than state, and update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display, wherein the state control means is update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display, and the updating means is a variable of the first identification information Further comprising a suggestive effect executing means capable of updating the numerical information when the display is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and executing a suggestive effect related to establishment of the special condition, wherein the suggestive effect is provided. The execution means has a different ratio of which of the plurality of presentation modes to execute the suggestive presentation in accordance with the number of executions of the variable display, and the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation suggests a period until the special condition is established. It is an aspect to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1h, for example, whether or not to execute a countdown production in a mode that suggests the number of fluctuations that is the condition for reducing the relief time The ratio may be changed according to the count value of the relief time saving counter. Also, the gaming machine of means 1h can be realized by, for example, using a table shown in FIG. 8-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer and the mode of presentation.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is a mode that can specify the number of execution times of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the number of times the variable display is performed until the special condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown effect in a mode suggesting the number of fluctuations as a condition for the relief time saving control.

(Means 3h) In means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is a effect of displaying a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of color and size is different, and displayed in any mode. The period until the implied special condition is established differs depending on whether the According to such a configuration, interest can be improved by drawing attention to the mode of the specific image.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 3h is configured to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for customers and the mode of presentation using, for example, a table shown in FIG. 8-25. Based on. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers counted down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to differ according to the count value of the relief time saving counter.

(Means 4h) In any one of means 1h to 3h, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition; Reservation storage means capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when variable display is not executed and no reservation storage is stored in the reservation storage means. and display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of means 4h is based on a configuration that determines whether or not to display a telop while waiting for customers, using a table shown in FIG. 8-25, for example.

(Means 5h) In any one of means 1h to 4h, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the start condition; Reservation storage means capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when variable display is not executed and no reservation storage is stored in the reservation storage means. and display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presence or absence of the mode of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of means 5h is based on a configuration that determines the effect mode of the telop display during customer waiting, for example, using the table shown in FIG. 8-25.

(Means 6h) In any one of means 1h to 5h, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display based on the start condition being satisfied and the starting condition being satisfied; Reservation storage means capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when variable display is not executed and no reservation storage is stored in the reservation storage means. and display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means detects at least one of the operation of the operating means and the passage of a game medium through a predetermined area while the predetermined image is displayed. Based on what has been done, a suggestive effect can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to the player actually playing the game, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of means 6h, for example, when the game machine is shifted to the demonstration state, the game ball is operated by operating the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or by the start port. If detected, it may be configured to display a telop indicating the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) In any one of means 1h to 6h, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestive effect execution means Depending on which setting value is set, the ratio of executing the suggestive effect differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

Note that, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the means 7h is based on a configuration that determines whether or not to display a telop while waiting for customers, using the table shown in FIG. 8-25.

(Means 8h) In any one of means 1h to 7h, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestive effect execution means Depending on which set value is set, the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest by drawing attention to the aspect of the suggestive effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the means 8h is based on a configuration for determining whether or not to execute the telop display during customer waiting and the mode of presentation using the table shown in FIG. 8-25.

(Means 9h) In any one of means 1h to 6h, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; A setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect to suggest is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means has a different ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect depending on which set value is set. The effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the suggestive effect regardless of the set value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and it is possible to suppress complication of the control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 9h, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, while making it possible to execute an effect that suggests a set value (for example, an effect with a different execution ratio depending on the set value), the telop display during customer waiting is executed regardless of which set value is set. It may be configured so that the ratio is common.

(means 10h) in any one of means 1h to 6h and means 9h, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value, wherein the setting suggestion effect execution means performs a setting suggestion effect in a specific manner according to which setting value is set. The execution ratio differs, and the suggestive effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the suggestive effect according to the specific mode regardless of the set value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to the aspect of the suggestive effect, and to suppress complication of the control.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 10h, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, while making it possible to execute an effect suggesting the set value (for example, an effect with a different execution ratio depending on the set value), even if any set value is set, the customer is waiting in a red effect mode. may be configured so that the execution ratio of the telop display is the same.

(Means 11h) In any one of means 1h to 10h, the suggestive effect execution means is configured so that when the power supply is started and the initialization process is executed and when the recovery process is executed, the power supply is stopped. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of the means 11c, for example, the execution ratio of the telop display during customer waiting and the countdown effect is different after the initialization process and after the power is restored. It should be configured as follows.

(Means 12h) Any one of means 1h to 11h includes variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, wherein the variable display pattern determination means When the condition is established, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and before the special condition is established, the special state is entered when the special variable display pattern is not determined and the variable display is executed by the special variable display pattern. Further provided is a specific notification effect executing means capable of executing a specific notification effect for notifying that the game is to be controlled. According to such a configuration, the player can be notified that the special condition is controlled to the special state by the establishment of the special condition, and the change in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, so that the player can enjoy the interest when the special condition is established. can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of the means 12h is based on a configuration using, for example, a relief time-saving variation deviation pattern table shown in FIG. 8-8(I).

(Means 13h) In any one of means 1h to 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determination means is provided, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases of the display result of the variable display being the specific display result and the case of not being the specific display result. When the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is higher than the predetermined period. When the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than in the previous period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of the means 13h is based on the configuration using the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 8-8(F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) In any one of means 1h to 13h, there is provided a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that the specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The executing means can execute the advance notice effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In the case, the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable display than the period before the predetermined period. When the result does not result in a specific display result, the proportion of execution of the advance notice effect is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 14h is based on a configuration that determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect by using a table shown in FIG. 8-32, for example.

(Means 15h) In any one of means 1h to 14h, there is provided a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that the specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The executing means is capable of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode and the predetermined mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when the specific display result is not the specific display result, and the display of the variable display. When the result is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on a configuration that determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect mode by using the table shown in FIG. 8-32, for example.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Sound control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Battering operation handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A game medium can be shot into the game area according to the player's operation, and when the starting condition is satisfied, the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the specific display result is derived. A game machine which can be controlled to an advantageous state by being displayed, and which can perform variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information on the display means. and
a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in a normal state;
updating means capable of updating the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display;
variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern;
The special state is
Among a first flow-down path through which the game medium shot to the game area can flow down and a second flow-down path different from the first flow-down path, shooting the game medium toward the second flow-down path is is more advantageous than shooting game media toward the first flow path,
A first special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, and a second special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied,
The state control means can be controlled to the second special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of execution times of the variable display. and
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is executed,
The variable display pattern determining means
In both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when the specific display result is not the specific display result, the specific variable display pattern can be determined,
when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, a ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern,
In the predetermined period before the special condition is established, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result is lower than in the period before the predetermined period. ,
The display means is
capable of displaying a special image suggesting that control to the second special state is possible when the special condition is established in a state in which the game is not progressing ;
capable of displaying a specific image suggesting the number of times the remaining variable display is performed until the special condition is established and the control is performed to the second special state;
displaying the special image in a display area that includes at least part of a display area that displays the specific image;
a first notification image for notifying that the control in the second special state is started when the special condition is established and the control is performed in the second special state; and a game medium directed toward the second flow path. It is possible to display a second notification image that notifies that the
displaying the first notification image in a manner that does not overlap with the effect identification information;
The characters included in the first notification image are characters of a size larger than the characters included in the second notification image,
The second notification image includes characters and graphics for notifying that the game medium is to be shot toward the second flow-down path.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images